1
9 8
SEVILLE
a
h
C A D I L L A C .
C R E A T I N G
A
HIGHER
STANDARD,,
(1a--Illzj
r t provides in an ernerg
Free lockout assistancf
Free dead-battery assistan
e out-of-fuel assistanc
flat-+ire change
Tranq
b
3%'
TO TOPICS QUICKLY. FOR l#FORMAT/ON~
Wearing a satetybelt correctly is one of the moa
and your passengers can do. This section CC,,.
infor1 tion about sa
usage, air bags &...
~
~..
,.
Pam 2-14
The 1998 Cadillac Seville Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safetybelts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
ComfortControlsandAudioSystems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how todrive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to doif you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6- 1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly andlooking good.
7-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Cadillac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 7- 12.
8-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Emblem and the
name SEVILLE are registered trademarks
of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it
in the
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Car Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
so it will be
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
there if you ever needit when you’reon the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual insoit the new
owner can useit.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefera
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
in
Litho
ReservedRights
25665434
Part All
No.
ii
Edition B First
How to Use thi- Mar::,al
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle.If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to lookfor what you need is the Indexin
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical listof what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll findit.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a numberof safety cautionsin this book.
We use abox and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore
the warning.
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash throughit in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, andit could be costly.
But the notice will tell
you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read othermanuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warningsin Merent colors orin
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They
use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
These symbols
have todo with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
COOLANT
TEMP
ee
FUSE
P
LIGHTER
I
(0) b e
HORN
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
BRAKE
BURNS
COOLANT
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAlTERY
--
BAllERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
CAUSTIC
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
#0
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
a
SPEAKER
e,
(a)
FUEL
12
B
L
V
,
;
A
-
-a+
Section 1 Seats and Restraint System
Here you’ll find information about
the seats in your Cadillac and how use
to your safety belts properly.You can also
learn about some things you should
not do with air bags and safety belts.
-2
.-7
.-11
.
1-12
1-12
1-18
1-19
1-19
Seats andSeat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone
Here are Questions Many People
Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) System
1-27
1-31
1-34
1-45
1-48
1-48
1-48
Rear Seat Passengers
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
This section tells you about the power seats -- how to
adjust them, and also about reclining front seatbacks,
lumbar adjustments, heated seats and head restraints.
The lumbar controlis
located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Use the
power seat control
first to get the proper
position. Then
proceed with the
lumbar adjustment.
Power Seats
The power seat
controls are locatedon
the outboard sideof
the front seat cushion.
I
To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar control
to decrease
forward to increase support and rearward
support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower
the support mechanism.
Move the front of the control up or down to adjust Keep
in mind, that as your seating position changes, as
thefrontportion of thecushionupordown.mayduringlongtrips,
so shouldtheposition of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.
Move the rearof the control to adjust the rear portion
of the cushion up or down.
Lift up or push down onthe whole control at the
same time to move the
entire seat up or down.
To move the whole seat forward or backward, slide
the control in the direction
of the center arrow.
it
Adaptive Seat Control(If Equipped)
The adaptive control is
located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Use the
power seat controlfirst
to get the proper
position. (The lumbar
will automatically
adjust to your body’s
positioning for the
duration of the tripin
four-minute cycles.)
With the ignition on, press the control up to activate the
adaptive seat.
To reshape the lower seatback, pressthe lumbar
control forward to increase support and rearward to
decrease support.
To turn offthe adaptive seat, pressthe control down.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Column (If Equipped)
The controls for this option
are locatedon the driver’s
door panel, andare used
to program and recall
previous settings.
2
MEMOffY
SET
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the lumbar and head
restraint adjustments), both the outside mirrors and
steering wheel column toa comfortable position and
then press the MEMORY SET button. Within
five
seconds, press button “1.”
A second &or, seating and column position may be
programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing
button 2. Each time a memory button is pressed,a single
beep will sound through the radio. Each time button1 or 2
is pressed, the memory positions will be recalled. At the
factory, the exit position is preset with the steering wheel
full up and the seatfull back. However, two personalized
exit positions canbe set by first recalling the driving
position (Driver“1” or “2”), positioning the wheel and
seat in the desired exit positions and then pressing the
MEMORY SET and, within five seconds, pressing the
EXIT button. The exit position for
either previously set
driver canbe recalled by pressing theEXIT button.
Heated Seat (Option)
This option isonly available if your vehicle is equipped
with the power lumbar control feature.
The front seat controls are
located in the center
console. The rear seat
controls, for the outboard
positions only, are located
on the rear door (note that
only the outboard positions
in the rear seats are heated).
Push the button oncefor a high setting, twice for a low
setting, and a third time to turn
off the heated seat.The
LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat
approximates body temperature.The HI setting heats the
seat to a slightly higher temperature.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. The heating elementsin the seats
automatically turn off when the vehicle’s ignition is
turned off.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
The power controls
are located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Press the
top of the control
forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback
angle. Push up or
down to adjust the
headrest and
shoulder belt.
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t their
do job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t
do its job.In a crash you
could gointo it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its
job either. In a crash the
belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection
when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Use this switch to movea
front head restraintup
or down.
Lift up on the switch to move the head restraint up.
Press down on the switch to movethe head restraint
down. The top of the head restraint shouldbe closest to
the topof your ears. This position helps reduce the
chance of a neck injury ina crash. Whenyou move a
front seat head restraint up
or down, the shoulder belt
height changes.The head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
Rear seat head restraintstilt forward and rearward.
1-6
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do
with safety belts.
It is extremely dangerousto ride ina cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these
areas are more
likely to be
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), orair bag system.
or she can’t wear
Don’t let anyone ride where he
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejectedfrom it. You can be seriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly
too.
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure
everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat andusing a
safety beltproperly.
L
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminderto
buckle up. (See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in
, the Index.)
~~
1-7
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If do
you
have a
crash, youdon’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashesare mild, and some crashes can
be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many
of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt
or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
I
Put someone on it.
Get it upto speed. Then stopthe vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-9
.
..
The person keeps going until stopped
by something.
In a real vehicle,it could be the windshield ...
1-10
or the instrument panel...
Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
&.. Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You couEd be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of
being conscious during and after
an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, much
is
greater if
you are belted.
&.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time tostop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the
forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them inthe future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offeredfor sale has required the use
of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up get
to the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
@
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault
-- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number
of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds
of less than40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This partis only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part
of this manual
called “Children.” Follow those rulesfor
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s
how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-12
3. Pick upthe latch plate and~ u lthe
l belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull upon the latch plate to make sure
it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” in the Index.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe
safety belt quickly if you ever hadto.
worn low and snug on
The lap part of the belt should be
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d
be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash.
1-13
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
When you move a front seat headrestraint, the shoulder
belt height changes.See “Head Restraints’’ in the Index.
@
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder beltis too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-14
u u
You can be seriously hurt your
if shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
What's wrong with this?
' A CAUTION:
You can beseriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like
this. In a crash,
the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The
belt forceswould be there, notat thepelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
I
@
What’s wrong with this?
I
You can beseriously injured if you wear the
In a crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm.
body would movetoo far forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strongas shoulder bones.
You could alsoseverely injure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
A:
The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulderat all times.
1-16
What’s wrong with this?
1
You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.
If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
to
dealer
your
fix it.
I
A:
The belt is twistedacross the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out
of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt
is out of the
way. If you slam the door on
it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-18
The best way to protectthe fetus is to protectthe
mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in acrash. For
pregnant women, asfor anyone, the key to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wearthe right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see “Driver Position” in the Index.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works
the same
way as the driver’s safety belt-- except for one thing. If
you ever pull thelap portion of the belt out allthe way,
you will engagethe child restraint locking feature.If
this happens,just let the belt go back all
the way and
start again.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) systems or air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a “Next Generation”
frontal air bagfor the driver, another “Next Generation”
frontal air bagfor the right front passenger, a side
impact air bagfor the driver, and another side impact air
bag for the right front passenger. Next Generation
frontal air bags are designed help
to reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But
even theseair bags must inflate very quickly if they
are
to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
1-19
Here are the most important things
to know about the air
bag systems:
A CAUTION:
-
-
-
You can beseverely injured orkilled in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things
inside thevehicle or being ejected fromit. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags even Next Generation air
bags are designed to work with safety belts
but
don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
--
--
*.w$l;
FA fZ,i,”$.
a!
Next Generation frontal air bags
for the driver
and right front passenger are
designed to work
only in moderate tosevere crashes where the
front of your vehicle hits something.They aren’t
designed to inflateat all in rollover, rear, sideor
low-speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained
occupants, Next Generation frontal airbags may
provide less protection infrontal crashes than
more forceful air bags have provided in the
past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflateonly in
moderate tosevere crashes where something hits
the sideof your vehicle. They aren’t designed to
inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in yourvehicle should wear asafety
belt properly whether or notthere’s an air bag
for thatperson.
--
1-20
I A CAUTION:
1
A C * “TION:
AI
Both frontal and side impact
air bags inflate with
great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could
seriously injure you. This is true even with Next
Generation frontal airbags. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and duringa crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with Next Generation frontalair bags. The
driver shouldsit as far back as possible while still
maintaining controlof the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean or
on sleep against
the door.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any
air bagwhen it inflates can beseriously injured
or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
has Next Generation frontal airbags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, butnot for young children and
infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bagsystem is designed for them.
Young children and infants
need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read
how, see the part of this manualcalled
“Children” andsee the caution labels on the
sunvisors and the right front passenger’s
safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tellsyou if thereis an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”
in the Index
for more information.
The driver’s frontalair bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-22
L
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panelon the passenger’s side.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag
is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closestto the door.
The driver’s side impact air bag
is in theside of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-23
A
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
or it
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attachor put anythingon the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below
this
range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will
be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not designed to inflate
in rollovers,
side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air
bags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe side
crashes involving afront door. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”The threshold level canvary
with specific vehicle design.Side impact air bagsare not
designed to inflatein frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
When should an air bag inflate?
help the occupant.A side impact air bag will only
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck.
are designedto inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
In any particular crash, noone can say whether an air
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.For
designed “threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight
frontal air bags, inflation is determined
by the angle of
into a wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold
the impact and how quickly
the vehicle slows down in
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle bags, inflation is determined by the location
of the
impact and how quicklythe side of the vehicle deforms.
1-24
What makes anair bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is ain
crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags,
the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all partof the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the
side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisionsfor the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
How does an air bag restrain?
After an air baginflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module-- the
even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside instrument panelfor the rightfront passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and
of the vehicle.The air bag supplements the protection
right front passenger’s side impact air bags
-- will be
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute theforce of
of the bag that come into
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,hot for a short time. The parts
contact
with
you
may
be
warm,
but not too hot to touch.
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
bags would not help you
in many typesof collisions,
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in vehicle, nor doesit stop people from leaving the vehicle.
many typesof collisions, including frontalor near
1-25
A CAUTIOD
When a.nair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for
people witha historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should getout as soon as itis safe to doso.
If you havebreathing problems but
can’t get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by openinga window or a door.
Your vehicle has afeature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when
the frontal
air bags inflate (if battery power
is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and
interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
1-26
0
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t getthem,the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will includeair bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual
for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readinessof the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering
for the driver’sor the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s
and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace theair bag
module inthe steering wheel, both theair bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s side impactair bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
For up to10 seconds after the ignitionkey is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflateduring improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates.Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare
probably part of the air bag systems.Be sure to
follow proper service procedures,and make sure
the person performing work
for you is qualified
to doso.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle.Your dealer and the Seville Service
Manual have informationabout servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems.To purchase a service manual,
see “Service and Owner Publications” the
in Index.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengersto buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they canstrike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-27
Rear Seat PassengerPositions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All three rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
2. h s h the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
1-28
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate andkeep pulling until you can buckle it.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt asyou pull up on the shoulder part.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
If the beltis not long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” in the Index. Make surethe release button
on the buckleis positioned so you would beable to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-29
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on
the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks
if there’s a sudden stopor a crash.
Children
Smaller Childrenand Babies
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult
size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size
of the traveler
changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and in
every Canadian provincesays children up to someage
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
IA CAUTION:
I
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even though your vehicle
has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, but not for young childrenand
infants. Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed
for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a childrestraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle.
1-31
U
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child
or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whetherit is
the right type and sizefor your child.A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might notstay low onthe hips,as it
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be over the
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the beltwould apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough
for one is always properly
restrained m a child or infant restraint.
1-32
Infants need complete support, including support
for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the restof its body. In a crash,an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settlesinto the restraint,so the crash
forces can be distributed across the strongest of
part
the
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby should be
secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This
is so
important that many hospitals today won’t release a
newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant
restraint available for the baby’s
first trip in a
motor vehicle.
at only 25 mph (40km/h), a 12-lb.(5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the babyin an infant restraint.
1 A CAUTION:
I
Never hold a baby in your
arms while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During acrash a babywill become so
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in acrash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-33
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided
by
appropriate restraints.
&." What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take
into
consideration not only the child's weight and size,
but also whether ornot the restraint willbe
compatible with the motor vehicle in whichit will
be used.
for use
An infant car bed(A) is a special bed made
in a motor vehicle. It's an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on
a
continuous flat surface. Withan infant car bed,
make sure that the infant's head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to face the rearof the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and aboutone year of age. This type
of restraint faces therear so that the infant’s head,
neck and bodycan have the support they needin a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts
-- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the
seat part
is removable.
1-35
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright toface forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed
to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, orup to around four years
of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is
designed to be used either
as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-36
A booster seat (F,G ) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four
to eight yearsof age. It’s designed to improve the
fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster seats
with shields use lap-only belts; however, booster
seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts.
Booster seats canalso help a child tosee out
the window.
1-37
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If it is, it
will have a label saying that
it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions
for the restraint.You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions
are important,
so if either oneof these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy fromthe manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
A child in a rearfacing child restraint canbe
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air
bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next
Generation frontalair bags. This is because the
back of the rearfacingchild restraint would be
very close to the inflatingair bag. Always secure
a rear-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but
before you do, always *
move the frontpassenger seatas far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in
a rear seat.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they
L
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
child restraintin the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing
restraint properly.
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s
why:
Keep in mind thatan unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden
stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-38
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be
anchored. If you needto have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Cadillac dealer to put
it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
you how to doit.
Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top
strap, and thatthe strap be anchored.
If your child restrainthas a top strap, your dealer can
obtain akit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle. The
dealer can theninstall the anchor for you. In Canada,
this work will be done
for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using
the instructions
provided in the kit.
1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
the earlier part
about the top strap
if the child restraint has one. sure
Be
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child
in the child restraint when
and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latchplate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-40
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it
helpful to use your
knee to push down onthe child
restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt andlet it go back all the
way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
- 1’ A child in arearfacing child restraint can be
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s
why:
seriously injuredor killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has Next Generation
frontal air bags. This
is because the back
of the rearfacing child
restraint would be very close tothe inflatingair
bag. Always securea rearfacing child restraint
in therear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
pan
about the top strapif the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1-42
1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back asit will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats”in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up thelatch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in
front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-43
I
5. Pull the restof the lap belt all the way out
of the
retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-44
1
Larger Children
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need
to use the
safety belts properly.
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown
out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-45
Never do this.
Here two children arewearing the samebelt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a
crash, thetwo children canbe crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must beused by
only one personat a time.
1-46
&:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
belt is
but thechild is so small that the shoulder
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sittingin a seat next to a window,
of the vehicle.If
move the child toward the center
the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint that
belts provide.
I
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting ain
seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt,but the shoulderpart is behind
the child.If the child wears the belt in way,
this in
a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The
belt’s force wouldthen be applied righton the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn low and snug
on the hips,just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should useit.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new belts?
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goBut if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will
be just foryou, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
you choose. Don’t let someone
else use it, and use it
or seat parts repaired
or replaced. Newparts and repairs
only for the seat itis made to fit.To wear it,just attach it
may be necessary even
if the belt wasn’t being used
at
to the regular safetybelt.
the time ofthe collision.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make surethe safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system
from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Tom or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any openedor broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The
air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-48
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need
to replace air bag
system parts. Seethe part on theair bag system earlierin
this section.
If the frontalair bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
kb
NOTES
1-49
$@
NOTES
ll
1-50
a-
A
‘-
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here youcan learn aboutthe many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained
are the instrument panel and
the warning systems that tell you if everything
is
working properly -- and what todo if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-7
2-10
2- 14
2- 14
2-16
2-17
2-18
2- 19
2-20
2-2 1
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-29
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System
Trunk
Theft
Theft-Deterrent System
PASS-Key@ I11
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-29
2-30
2-3 1
2-32
2-33
2-40
2-44
2-46
2-5 1
2-53
2-55
2-56
2-60
2-64
2-75
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Express Sunroof (Option)
Universal Transmitter (Option)
The Instrument Panel:Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC)
2-1
Keys
-
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in
a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured
or
even killed.
They could operate powerwindows or other
controls or even make thevehicle move. If they
turned theignition toON and moved the shift
lever outof PARK (P),that would release the
parking brake.Don't leave the keys in a vehicle
with young children.
2-2
There is a master key that
works in all of the lock
cylinders (driver’s door,
glove box,trunk and
ignition). There is also a
valet key which only
operates the driver’s door
and the ignition.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft.
You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle
if you ever lock
your key inside and you may have to damage
your vehicle to get in. Be sure you have an
extra key.
Both the master and valet keys have a transponder
embedded into the key for security and theft deterrence.
The keys also come with bar
a code tag. Keepthe bar
code tag in safe
a place. If youlose your key you will be
able to have a newone made using the bar code tag.
The replacement key must have a transponder embedded
in it.
2-3
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, you
must unlockthe doors with the key orRKE transmitter
to avoid settingoff the alarm.
Door Locks
I
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall
out. When a dooris
locked, the inside handle won't open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through an unlocked
door when you slowdown or stop yourvehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren'tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
The manual lockis on the
top of the door panel near
the window.Push the
manual lock lever downto
lock the door from the
inside. To unlock the door,
raise the lock lever.
Central Door UnlockingSystem
When unlocking thedriver's door, you can unlock the
other doors by holding the key in the turned position for
rhere are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. a few seconds or by quickly rotating the key twice in the
%om the outside, use either the key or the Remote
lock cylinder.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2-4
Automatic Door Locks
Power Door Locks
Press the up arrowon the
power door lock switch to
unlock all of the doors at
once. Press the down arrow
to lockthe doors.
Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every time
you move the shift lever outof PARK (P), all of the
doors will lock.The doors will unlockevery time you
stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK
(P).
If someone needs to getout while your vehicleis not in
PARK (P), have that person usethe manual or power
lock. When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual or power lock
to lock the
door again.If you need to lock the doors before shifting
out of PARK (P), use the manual
or power lock switch
to lock the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
The rear power door lock switches only provide a
lock function asa safety feature. They will not unlock
the doors.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and
the ignition inON,
the door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed by the Driver Information Center(DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock
and unlock settings. For programming information,
see
“Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index.
2-5
Rear Door SecurityLock
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks thathelp prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doorsof your
vehicle from the inside.
To use this lock:
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. You may unlock the door by using the remote
keyless entry transmitter,the front door powerlock
switch or by manually liftingthe rear door lock
knob. Open the door from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Anti-Lockout Feature
1. Move the leveron the doorall the way up to the
ENGAGED position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing tothe other rear door lock.
The rear doorsof your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this featureis in use.
When you want to openrear
a door whenthe security
lock is on:
1. You may unlock the door by using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, thefkont door power lock switch or
by manually lifting the rear door lock knob.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
Leaving your key in any ignition position with any door
open will disable the use of the power door lock
switches and the remote keyless entry lock function. If
you closethe doors, you can lock them by using the
power door lock switchesor the RKE system. It is
always recommended that you remove
the ignition key
when locking your vehicle.
The anti-lockout feature can be overridden by holding
the power door lock switch
for three secondsor longer.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open the door,
set the
locks fromthe inside, getout and close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System
With this feature, you can
lock and unlock the
doors,
unlock the trunk, open the
fuel door and turnon your
vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 30 feet (9 m)
away using theRKE
transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
I
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause interference, and( 2 ) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other thanan
authorized service facility could void authorization
to
use this equipment.
The range of this system is about30 feet (9 m). At times
you may noticea decrease in range.This is normal for
any RKE system. If the transmitter does not work
or if
you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the
transmitter to work, try this:
Your RKE system is intended to be used as
a
supplementary vehicle entrydevice. It is not intended to
replace, but rather should be used in conjunction with,
a
door lock key.It operates ona radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
This device complies with Part15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and ( 2 )this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause
undesired operation.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealeror a
qualified technician for service.
2-7
Operation
The numbers on the backof the RKE transmitter
correspond to Driver 1 and Driver2. See “Memory
Seat and Personalization”in the Index. Remote
confirmation is not operational if any door
is open.
Resynchronization
Pressing the transmitter buttons numerous times
(approximately 250 times) out of the vehicle’s operating
range may cause the transmitter not
to work. Replacing
the battery and pressing the transmitter buttons out
of
range will also cause the transmitter not to work.
If only
When you press this symbol to unlock the driver’s
the
fuel
door
button
works,
the
transmitter
needs
to be
door, the parking lamps on your vehicle will blink twice.
resynchronized to the receiver.Do this by pressing and
(You can program your vehicleso the parking lamps will
not flash. For more information on other program options, holding both theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
see “Remote Confirmation” in the Index.) Pressing it again transmitter for about eight seconds.You must be within
range of the vehicle.
within five seconds will unlockthe other doors. Pressing
Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the horn
this button will also disarm the optional theft-deterrent
will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once.
The
system and turn on the interior lamps at night.
system should now operate properly. See your dealer
for
When you press this symbol to lock the doors, the
service if your transmitterstill doesn’t work properly.
parking lamps will blink once and the horn will chirp
once. (You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
will not flash andor the horn will not sound. For more
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
information on other program options, see “Remote
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
Confirmation” in the Index.)This also arrns the optional
If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can be
theft-deterrent system when the ignition is turnedoff.
purchased through your dealer. Once your dealer has
Press this symbol to open the trunk.
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only
up to
Press this button to open the fuel door.
four transmitters matched toit.
The RKE transmitter can also be used to recall the
memory seats for up to two drivers. For more information, All transmitters must be present when replacement or
additional transmitters are being programmed.
see “Memory Seat and Mirrors”in the Index.
&
9
a
2-8
Battery Replacement
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to
get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it’s probably timeto change the battery.
I NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
1. Insert a coininto the notch near the key ring
of the
transmitter. Turn the cointo separate the two halves
of the transmitter.
2-9
Trunk
2. Remove and replace the battery. Insert the new
battery as the instructions under the cover indicate.
3. Snap the transmitter back together and resynchronize
it by pressing and holding the lock and unlock
buttons for about eight seconds within range
of the
vehicle. Once the transmitter
is resynchronized, the
horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will
flash once.
2-10
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid
open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
If you must drivewith the trunklid open or if
electrical wiringor other cableconnections must
pass through theseal between the body and the
trunk lid:
0 Make sure allwindows are shut.
”urn the fan on your heating
or cooling
system to itshighest speed with the setting
on AUTOand the temperaturebetween
65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C).That will
force outsideair into yourvehicle. See
ccComfort Controls”in theIndex.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way.
See ccEngine Exhaust” in the
Index.
Trunk Lid TieDown
Trunk Lock Release
To use this feature,
your vehicle must be
in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the
valet lock switch must be
off. Press the release button
located below the lamp
controls onthe left side of
the instrument panel.
You can also press the trunk release buttonthe
onRKE
transmitter to access the trunk compartment.
A CAUTION:
Driving with thetrunk lid open can allow
dangerous CO (carbon monoxide) gas to come
into your vehicle.You can't see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you ever need to drive with your
trunk lid
open, then:
Make sure all windows, the rear seat
pass-through, and the sunroof
are closed.
'hrn the fan on your heatingor cooling
system toits highest speed, with the setting
on VENT. This forces fresh outside
air into
your vehicle.
Open allair ducts on the instrument panel.
Do not use the Trunk Lid Tie
Down if you are
towing a trailer,or if you are carrying a pet in
the trunk, because of the dangerof CO.
2-11
Trunk Storage System (Option)
A
This featureis used to securethe trunk lidif it will not
close completely, such as when carrying large packages
in the trunk.
1. Attach the end loopof the tie downto the retainer
located at the center
of the trunk sill (SeeView B).
2. Attach the clip endof the tie down to the D-ringon
the trunk lid. (See
View A).
3. Tighten the tie down by pulling the
free end of the
cord until secure.
4. To remove the tie down, press the clip end to release
and loosen the cord.
2-12
The trunk storage system can be used to organize many
different items inside the trunk. The storage system
(A)
is located ontop of the spare tire cover
(B).
To install the storage system:
1. Remove the mat from thefloor of the trunk. Remove
the handle from the spare tire panel and store it with
the spare tire.
2. Place the trunk storage system on the center
of the
trunk floor(the cut-out portion of the storage system
should befacing the front of the vehicle).Slide the
storage system fully forward.
3. Center the storage system access hole over the area
where the spare tire panel handle was located.
Position the storage system as needed and then
secure it with the retainer.
4. Attach the removable net tothe slots located on the
side andfront of the divider walls.
6. Replace the mat on the floor of the trunk.
There is also a small storage compartment located on the
right of the trunk inthe side trim panel.You can access
the compartmentby lifting the panel door.
Rear Seat -ass-Through Door
Once in place, the storage system can be moved forward
or rearwardfor convenience and easy accessing
of
stored items.
The following steps explain how to remove the trunk
storage systemfor cleaning or in case you need to access
the spare tire. Follow allof these steps if the storage
system is in the open position. Begin withStep 2 if the
system is already closed.
1. Fully close the trunk storage system.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slide the storage system fully forward.
Remove the retainer by turning it to the left.
Remove the trunk storage systemfrom the trunk.
Replace the spare tire panel handle.
The rear seat pass-through release is located in the
trunk. To release the pass-through door, press
the button
located inthe center of the trunk panel. Note that
the
rear-seat armrest must be pushed down
for the
pass-through door to open.You may close the door
from inside the vehicle.
2-13
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number
of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put itoncan makeit
impossible to steal. However, there
are ways you
can help.
If you park in lot
a where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock
it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
0
If possible, park in a busy, well
lit area.
0
Put your valuablesin a storage area, like your
trunk or glovebox. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
0
Close all windows.
0
Lock the glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside,
it’s an
easy target forjoy riders or professional thieves
-- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take
it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition and transaxle will be locked. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Rememberto keep your valuables outof sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-14
SECURITY
If the ignition isoff and
any dooris open, the
SECURITY light will
flash, reminding you to
arm the system.
To arm the system, dothe following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch or
the RKE system withthe door open. The
SECURITY light should come on and stay
on.
If you activate the alarmby accident, unlockthe driver’s
door with your key.You can also turn offthe alarm by
using the unlock button of the RKE system,or by
starting thecar with a valid key.
Changes or modifications made to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to usethe theft system.
3. Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should go
off within approximately30 seconds.
Testing the Alarm
When the theft system activates, the horn will sound and
1. From inside the vehicle, roll downthe window, then
the lamps willflash for about 30 seconds when the door
get outof the vehicle, keepingthe door open.
or trunk is opened without
the key or RISE system.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock
Remember, the theft-deterrent system
won’t arm if you
the vehicle usingthe power door lockor the RKE
lock the doors witha key or usethe manual door lock. It
system and closethe door. Wait 30 seconds until the
activates only if you usea power door lock switch with
SECURITY lamp goesoff.
the door open orthe RKE system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock
To avoid activating the alarmby accident:
and open the door.The horn will sound andthe
The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
hazard lights will flash.
the manual door lock switch
after the doorsare
If the alarm does not sound when
it should, check tosee
closed if you don’t wantto arm the theft-deterrent
if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To
system.
replace the fuse,see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
0 Always unlock a door with a key or use theRKE
Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may
system. (Pressingthe unlock button on the RKE
need to have your vehicle serviced.
transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.)
To reduce the possibility of theft, alwaysarm the optional
Unlocking a door any other way will activate
the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
alarm whena door or the trunkis opened.
Valet Lock
Your PASS-Key I11 system operates ona radio
frequency subjectto Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
the glovebox on the left-hand
side. Pressing this switch to
ON will disable the use of
the trunk, fuel door and
garage door opener.
Pressing this switchto OFFwill make these features
reusable. Locking the glove
box with yourkey will also
help to secure your vehicle. Note that the RKE
transmitter can't open thetrunk or fuel door if the valet
lock switchis on.
PASS-Key' 111
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key I11
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key111 is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you don't havedoto
anything different to arm or disarm the system.
It works
when you insertor remove the key from the ignition.
2-16
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must acceptany interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, (2)
and
this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operationof the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key 111 uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key111 system senses that someoneis
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle's starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical
key codes.
If when trying to start the vehicle,
the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY
message is displayed in the Driver Information Center,
your key should be checkedfor damage. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want tocheck the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers’’ inthe Index). If the engine still does
not start withthe other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
the
PASS-Key I11 to have anew key made.
If you are ever driving and the SERVICE
THEFT
SYSTEM message is displayed inthe Driver
Information Center orthe SECURITY light comes on
and stays on, you will be
able to restart your engineif
you turn it off. Your vehicle is not protectedby the
PASS-Key@111system at this time.Your PASS-Key@
I11 system is not working properly and must
be serviced
by your dealer.
If you lose or damage a PASS-KeyI11 key, see your
dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key 111to
have a new key made.
New Vehicle 66Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the
long
run if you followthese guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the
first
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
for
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index
more information.
--
--
ACC: This position lets you use things like the radio and
the windshield wipers when the engineis off. Use ACC if
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turnyou must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is
the key to four different positions:
off (for example, if your vehicle
is being pushed).
ON: This is the position for driving.
OFF: This positionlets you
turn off the engine and
START This starts the engine.
remove the key.It doesn’t
lock the steering wheel.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Ignition Positions
The following accessorieson your vehiclemay be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned from
ON to OFF:
Cellular Phone (If Equipped)
Radio
PowerWindows
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
Express Sunroof (Option)
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
-
2-18
~
Power to these accessories stops after10 minutes or if
any dooris opened. If you want powerfor another
10 minutes, close all the doors, turn the ignition
key to
ON and then backto OFF. If the cellular phoneis being
used while Retained Accessory Power
is in effect, the
timer is suspended (to avoid interruption
of the call).
The timer resets to10 minutes at the end of the call.
Starting Your Engine
Starting Your Northstar V8 Engine
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
-- that’s a
Your engine won’t start in any other position
safety feature. Torestart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition keyto START. When the engine starts,let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
I NOTICE:
I
Don’t try to shift to
PARK (P)if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
I NOTICE:
I
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause yourbattery tobe
drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your startermotor. Wait about
15 seconds between eachtry to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key
in
START for about three seconds ata time until your
engine starts. Wait about15 seconds between each
try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2-19
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again,do the same thing.
Engine CoolantHeater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0°F (-18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help.You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
I NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in your vehicle. If youadd electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform
properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-20
I
A CAUTION:
Automatic TransaxleOperation
several
different
There
are
positions
PARK (P): This locks the
front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you
start the engine because
your vehicle can’t
move easily.
Plugging the cord into
an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock.Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sureto unplug and
store the cord asit was before to keep
it away
from moving engine parts.If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature,the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealerin the area where you’ll
be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that
particular area.
lever.
for
shift
the
A CAUTION:
I
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicleif the
shift leveris not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-21
REVERSE (R): Use this gearto back up.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your
parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully PARK
in
(P) before
starting the engine.Your Cadillac hasa brake-transaxle
shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in the ON position. If you cannot shift the
shift lever all the wayinto PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever push the
shift lever all theway into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
2-22
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage yourtransaxle.
Shift to REVERSE
(R) only after yourvehicle
has stopped.
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back forth
and to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle. See“If You’re Stuckin Sand, Mud, Iceor
Snow” in the Indexfor additional information.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels.
To restart when you’re
already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only. Also use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed.
NOTICE:
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engineis “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot
is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose controland hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of
PARK (P)or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
OVERDRIVE (@):This position is for normal driving.
If you need more powerfor passing, and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
0 Going about 35 mph (55 M)or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transaxle will shift down
to the next gear and
have more power.
If your vehicle seems to
start up rather slowly, or
if it doesn’t seem to shiftgears as you accelerate,
something may be wrong with
a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.So if this happens, have
your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2)when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and OVERDRIVE (@)
for higher speeds.
Note that if the traction control switch off,
is your
vehicle will notgo into FIRST (1) gear and the vehicle
will acceleratefrom stop more slowly.This can help in
deep snow or mud conditions. When the traction control
is turned off, a message will belit on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
THIRD (3): This position is also used
for normal
driving, however,it offers more power and lower
fuel
economy than OVERDRIVE(a).
2-23
Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of
OVERDRIVE
(a):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power.
You
can use SECOND(2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as yougo down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes
off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage yourengine.
2-24
1 S 4 ’ Ti):This position gives you even more power
than SECOND(2). You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow ormud. (If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (l), the transaxle won’t shift into gear until
the
vehicle is going slowly enough.)
1 NOTICE:
’’
’
~
~~
~~
~
~
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happenif you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud or were up againsta solid
object. You could damage yourtransaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could cause overheating
and damage
the transaxle.Use your brakes tohold your
vehicle in position on ahill.
Parking Brake
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot and Dush down the
parking drake pedal with
your left foot to set the
parking brake. If the
ignition is on, the PARK
indicator light should come
on. If it doesn’t, you need to
have your vehicle serviced.
If the parking brake has not been fully released and you
try to driveoff with the parking brake on, thePARK
indicator light comes on andstays on. See “Parking Brake
Indicator Light”in the Index for more information.
When you shift out ofPARK (p) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine is on, the parking brake should release.
If it doesn’t,you can manually release the parking brake.
I
I
I
I
1
Always shift toPARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever.If your hand or armis in
the way of the pedalyou could be hurt. The pedal
springs back quickly. Keep your hand and arm
away when youuse the manual release lever.
2-25
Before releasingthe manual parking brake, be sure
to putthe vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition
to OFF.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel
and pull down on the manual release lever, which
is
located rearwardof the parking brake pedal. A yellow
tab is attached to the manual release lever.If the parking
brake does not release, you should have your vehicle
towed to your dealer for service.
NOTICE:
Driving with theparking brakeon can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them andyou could alsodamage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a see
hill,
“Towing a Trailer”in the Index. This section shows
what to dofirst to keep the trailerfrom moving.
26
Shifting Into PARK (P)
’ A CAUTIO,.:
I
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured.
To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in theIndex.
Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal
down with your
right foot.
P
a
3
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
0
Push the shift lever all the way toward the front
of your vehicle and to the left.
With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
Leaving Your VehicleWith the
Engine Running
I
I
I
U:
It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with the
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running,it could
overheat andeven catch fire.You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle
is in PARK (P) and your
parking brakeis firmly set before you leave
it.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with
the ignition keyin your
hand, your vehicle isin PARK (P).
2-27
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and don’t
you shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how,see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fullyapply your regular brakes
before you can shift fromPARK (P)when the ignition is
in ON. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever
hold the brake pedal down butstill can’t shift outof
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anotherPARK (P), try this:
vehicle push yours little
a
uphill to take some
of the
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Open and closethe
pressure from the parking pawl the
in transaxle, so you
driver’s door to turnoff the RAP feature.
can pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
2. Apply and hold the brake until the endof Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-28
Parking Over ThingsThat Burn
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don'tpark
over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't seeor
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming if:
in
0 Your exhaust system soundsstrange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged whendriving
over high points on the road
or over
road debris.
0 Repairs weren't done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blowany
out
CO; and
0 Have your vehiclefiied immediately.
, <
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running.if you
But
ever have to, here are some things
to know.
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in aclosed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at the highestsetting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.(See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-30
--
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P)with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your
parking brake after
you move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling
a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all power windows. Press the down
arrow to the second position to activate the
express-down feature. If you want to stop the window as
it is lowering, pressthe up arrow.
Windows
Power Windows
Rear Window Lockout
I
This isa useful featureif
you have children as
passengers. Pressing the
button down will disable the
rear passenger window
controls. A light on the
switch willlight to indicate
that the rear window
controls are disabled.
The controls are located near each window. Press the up or
down arrows on the controls to raise or lower the windows.As the driver, you will still have control
of the windows.
Press
the
button
again
to
allow
your
passengers
to use
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power
(RAP).
their window controls.The light onthe switch goes out
When you stop your vehicle andturn the ignition key to
to indicate that the rear window controls are enabled.
OFF, you can still use your power windows. The
electrical power to operate the windows will not off
shut
until you open a dooror until 10 minutes have passed.If
you want this power for another 10 minutes, turn the
ignition key toON and back toOFF.
2-31
Horn
The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center
of
the steering wheel pad.
to a comfortable position and then release the lever to
lock the wheel into place.
Power Tilt and Telescopic Wheel (Option)
Tilt Wheel
If the power column switchis pressed up or down and
Tiltsteeringallowsyoutoadjustthesteeringwheelheldinthatposition,therewillbe
a slightmovement
beforeyoudrive.Raisingthesteeringwheeltotheandaslightpausefollowedbyacontinuousmovement
highest level gives your legs more room when you enter in the direction the switch
is being pressed. This allows
vehicle.
the
very
exit
and
fine control of
steering
the
wheel
position.
the If
Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you to switch is bumped, the column moves approximately one
bring the wheel close to you. Adjust the steering wheel degree in the direction commanded.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
’hrn and Lane Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever the
on left side of the
steering wheel all theway up or down. The lever returns
automatically when the turnis complete.
I
A
for burned-out bulbs
Breakers” in the Index) and check
if the arrow failsto work when signalinga turn.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
When the headlampsare on,
push the lever to turn the
headlamp high beams on,
and pullit to the center
position to turn on the low
beams. This light on the
instrument panel will be
on,
indicating high-beam usage.
instrument
the on
arrow
I An
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
Flash-To-Pass
Raise or lower thelever until the arrow startsto flash to
signal a lane change. Hold
it there until the lane change
is complete. Thelever returns when it’s released.
If the turn signalis left on, a warning chime will sound
and the DIC will display TURN SIGNALON (after
driving about a mile)to remind you to turnit off.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signalingfor a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers won’tsee the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbsto help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit
This letsyou use the high-beam headlamps to signal the
driver in frontof you that you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal lever toward you briefly to
flash-to-pass. When you do:
If the headlamps are either off or in theDRL mode,
the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They’ll stay
on as long as you hold the lever there. Release the
lever to turn them off.
If the headlamps are on low beam, low beam will
remain active and high beam will
also illuminate
until you release the lever.
Windshield Wipers
I
INTERMITTENT (DELAY): Push the lever upto the
INT position, then turn the band (INT
ADJ), which is
located on the lever, to adjust
the delay time. The higher
you turn the band, the faster the wipers will move.
LO or HI: Push the lever up toLO for steady wiping at
a slow speed. Push the lever higher HI
to for steady
wiping at a high speed.
OFF: Lower the lever toits resting position(OFF) to
turn off the wipers.
To wash the windshield, press the center button located
at the tipof the lever.
Be sure to clear
ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If the bladesdo become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
You can control the windshield wipers by moving the Heavy snow orice can overload the wiper motor.
A
lever with the wiper symbol on it. This lever
is located
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
on the right sideof your steering column. For
away snow orice to prevent an overload.
information on wiper activated headlamp operation,
refer to “Wiper-Activated Headlamps”in the Index.
MIST Pull the lever down once and releaseforita
single wipe cycle. For more cycles, hold the lever down
in the MIST position longer.
2-34
Rainsense Wipers (STS Only)
This moisturesensor is mounted on the passenger’s
interior sideof the windshield behind the rearview
mirror andis used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoringthe amount of moisture that is
on the windshield.
I NOTICE:
The wipers must be turned
off when going
through a car washto avoid damage.
The Rainsense system can be activated by turning the It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature
(INT ADJ) can be overridden atany time by manually
wiper stalk to oneof the five sensitivity settings within
changing the wiper control to
LO or HI speed.
the INT ADJ area. The bottom INT ADJ position is the
lowest sensitivity setting. Thisallows more water to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Rotating the
ADJ settings
INT ADJ band up to the other INT
NOTICE:
increases the sensitivityof the system and frequencyof
wipes. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the
Do not place stickers or other items on the
INT ADJ to a higher sensitivity setting. An initial wipe
exterior glass surface directly
in front of the
occurs when you turn the ignition on as a reminder that
rainsensor. Doing this could cause the rainsensor
Rainsense is active. The windshield wipers also remain
to malfunction.
in a “high park” position, even when the ignition
is
turned off.
The Rainsense wipers operate
in a delay mode as well
as a continuous low or high speed depending on
the
amount of moisture and the sensitivity setting.The
MIST and “wash” cycles operate as normal and are
not affected bythe Rainsense function.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Contr-1
The cruise control lever is
located on the right sideof
the steering column.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
The windshield washer has both a “demand” mode and a
“programmed” mode, depending on the amount
of
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of
windshield washer fluid you need.
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour
For programmed mode, press and release the button on foot onthe accelerator. This can helpon long trips.
the tipof the lever. The washer will provide a measured Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
amount of fluid to the windshield and the wiper will 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control is on,
you will
either stop or returnto your original wiping speed. For see a telltale labeledCRUISE in the instrument cluster.
demand mode, press and hold
the button until you have
enough fluid, and the wipers will either stop or return to Cruise control shutsoff when you apply your brakes.
your original wiping speed.
CHECK WASHER FLUID will be displayed on
the DIC
when the washer fluid reaches a low level.
2-36
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control canbe dangerous whereyou
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
I
A CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when
you’re notusing cruise, you might hita button
and go into cruisewhen you don’t wantto. You
could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise controlswitch off until you want touse it.
I
I
I
If your vehicleis in cruise control when the traction
control system beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow youto safely useit again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
I
Press the outer right button on the lever to turn on
l . the system.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
to
The cruise
3. Press the switch down once SETKST.
telltale will come on.
4. Remove yourfoot from the accelerator Pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing SpeedWhile Using Cruise Control
Setting the cruise control at a desired speed then
and
applying the brake will end
the cruise function.
There are two ways
to go to a higher speed:
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can push upon the cruise control switch RES/ACC
(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second to reset.
This returns you to your desired preset speed. The cruise
telltale will come on.
Remember, if you hold the switch at RES/ACC longer
than half a second, the vehicle will accelerate until
you
release the switchor apply the brake.So unless you
want to go faster, don’t holdthe switch at RES/ACC.
2-38
Use the accelerator pedal togo to a higher speed.
Push the cruise lever(SETKST) and then release the
lever and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at
the higher speed.
Push upward on RES/ACC. Hold it there until you
reach a desired speed and then release the switch.
(To increase your speed in very small amounts, press
up one second at a time. Each time you
do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will only work after
you have set
the cruise control speed by pushing downward on the
switch to SET/CST.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
How well yourcruise control will work on hills depends
of the hills.
upon your speed, load and the steepness
When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may haveto brake or shift toa lower gear
to keep your speed down.
Of course, applying the brakes
or downshifting into FIRST(1) takes you outof cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Push the cruise lever (SETKST) down and hold it
until you reacha desired lower speed, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the cruise
lever (SETKST) down briefly. Each timeyou do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end
cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Press the buttonon the end of the switch.
Pull the lever (CANCEL) toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when you
turn off the cruise control or the ignition.
~~
~~
~
~~
Exterior Lamps
~
~~
~
~~~~
Headlamps
The control on theleft side
of the instrument panel
controls these lamp systems:
The control for the headlampsis on the left side
of the
instrument panel.Turn the lamp controlknob all the
way to the right to turn the headlamps
on and all other
lights that turn on with the parklamps. Turn the control
knob all the way to the left to turn
the headlamps off.
The lightson indicator is on if the headlamps are on.
WiperActivated Headlamps
This featureturns on the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been
in use for
approximately six seconds.
0
Headlamps
0
Taillamps
0
Parking Lamps
0
Sidemarker Lamps
0
License Plate Lamp
0
Underhood Lamp
0
Fog Lamps (STS Only)
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Courtesy Lamps
0
Instrument panel backlighting will dim only when
it is
dark outside.
2-40
To operate the wiper-activated headlamps, the twilight
sentinel must be on.
If the wiper-activated headlamps
are on and the ignition switch
is turned to ACC, the
wiper-activated headlamps will continue. When you
turn the key to OFF, the wiper-activated headlamps will
immediately turn off.
The wiper-activated headlampswill turn off if you turn off
the twilight sentinel orthe windshield wipers. I€turned off
by deactivating the twilight sentinel, a HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will be displayed.
Parklamps
Turn the lamp control once to the
right to turn onthe
parklamps, taillamps, markerlamps,license lamp and
underhood lamp. The lights on indicator willbe on if the
parklarnp switchis on. Turn to the left to turn these
lights off.
Lamps On Reminder
You will hear a warning chime
if you open the driver’s
door while leavingthe lamps on and the manual
headlamp or parklamp control is activated. An exception
to thisis when you’re using twilight sentinel, iforthe
ignition is on.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make
it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL canbe helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can
be especially helpful inthe
short periods after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when:
0
0
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
the transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps (at
reduced brightness) willbe on. No other exterior lamps
such as the parking lamps, taillamps,etc. will be on
when the DRLare being used. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When the twilight sentinel switchis on and it’s dark
enough outside, the high-beam headlamps
(at reduced
intensity) will turn off and normal low-beam headlamp
operation will occur. When
the twilight sentinel switch
is on and it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps
will go off, and the high-beam headlamps at reduced
brightness will take over.
If it’s dark outside and
the twilight sentinel controlis
off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
display on the DIC. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lampsis recommended even
though the DRLare still illuminated. It has become dark
enough outsideto require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps. Turning on the twilight sentinelthe
or
headlamp switch will deactivate theDRL and remove
the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message.If the
parking lamps or the
fog lamps were turned on instead,
the DRL will still deactivate and the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will continue tobe displayed.
2-41
To idle your vehicle withthe DRL off, turn off the
twilight sentinel and shiftthe transaxle into PARK (P).
Placing your vehicle inPARK (P)disables theDRL.
The DRL will stay off until you shiftout of PARK (P).
To drive your vehicle with theDlU off, turn off
the twilight sentinel and manually turn
on the
parking lamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need
it.
Fog Lamps (STS Only)
Use thefog lamps for better vision in foggyor misty
conditions. When you push thefog lamp switch located
next to the headlamp switch, a small indicator light and
the LIGHTSON and FOG LAMP ON telltales on the
instrument panel cluster will tell you that fog
thelamps
and the parking lampsare on. Pushing the fog lamp
switch again will turn them off.
If you switch on the high-beam headlamps, the
fog
lamps will turn off. They’ll turn back
on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps. You can use thefog
button to turn the fog lamps on
or off when the
parklamps or headlamps areon.
2-42
When the twilight sentinelis on and the fog lamp switch
is activated, thefog lamps, headlamps and parking
lamps will remainon.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come
on when the headlamps or
parking lamps areon and you signal a turn. They
provide more lightfor cornering.
Twilight Sentinel
The controlis below the
headlamp knob. It
automatically turns the
lamps on and off by
sensing how darkit
is outside.
To operate the twilight sentinel, leave the lamp knob
off
and move theTWILIGHT slider control to any position
but OFF.
If you movethe control all the way tothe right (MAX),
the lamps will remain on
for approximately three
minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF
to or
ACC. If you movethe control so it is just on, the lamps
will go off quickly when youturn the ignitionout of
ON. You can adjustthe delay timefrom only a few
seconds to three minutes.
Light Sensor
If it’s dark enough outside and
the twilight sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage
will display on the DIC. This message informs the
driver that turning on
the exterior lampsis
recommended (it’s become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps).
Turning onthe twilight sentinel,the headlamp switch or
the fog lamp switch will removethe HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message.
The light sensor for the DRL and the twilight sentinelis
located on the driver’s side
of the front defoggergrille.
If you cover the sensor,it will read “dark” and the lamps
will come on.
2-43
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parklampsor headlamps control has been
turn off approximately 10
left on, the exterior lamps will
minutes after the ignitionis turned to OW. This protects
draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the
If you need to leave the
headlamps or parking lamps on.
lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the manual control
to turn the lamps back on.To delay the lamps from turning
off, see “Twilight Sentinel’, in theIndex.
the button lightly to release it to the outward position.
Tum
to the left to dirn and to the right to brighten the lighting.
Interior Lamp Switch
The interior lamp switch,
located in the overhead
console, has three positions:
OFF, AUTO and ON.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
With the parking lamps on,
the instrument panel
lighting automatically dims
when it becomes dark
outside and brightens when
it becomes light outside.
When it’s dark,and if the parklampsare on, the brightness
control canbe manually adjusted by using the control
Push
located to the right of the twilight sentinel control.
2-44
For the lamps toturn on automatically, place the control to
AUTO. With the switch in the
AUTO position and the front
door opened, the overhead console light, front hush panel
lamps, and rear footwell lampsin the door will come on.
When the rear door
is opened, all the fiont door lighting and
rear overhead lamps will come on.
When the switch in
is the ON position, the courtesy lamps are
off. (All
turned on.In the OFF position, the lamps are turned
automatic interior lighting functions are terminated.) When
is in the OFF position, only the driver
the interior lamp switch
door switch and ignition switch backlighting functions
will operate.
Illuminated Entry
Reading Lamps
The illuminated entry system turns on the courtesy
lamps and the backlighting to
the driver's door switches
and tothe ignition key when adoor is opened or if you
press the RKE transmitter unlock button.The
illuminated entry system works with
the light sensor and
it must be dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps or
backlighting to turn on.The courtesy lamps turnoff
approximately 25 seconds afterthe last door is closed or
after the ignition keyis placed inthe RUN position orif
the RKE transmitter lock button is pressed.
The reading lamps are located in the roof. These lamps
and the interior courtesy lamps come on when any door
is opened andit is dark outside. The rear lamps come
turn
on when a rear dooris opened. Press the button to
them on. Pressit again to turn themoff.
If the reading lamps areleft on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle electrical load and determine when
Parade Dimming
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
This feature prohibits the dimmingof the instrument
times of high electrical loading, the engine
may idle at a
panel lights during daylight while the parking lamps
are
higher R€" setting than normal to make sure the battery
on. This feature works with the light sensor and is fully
charges. High electrical loadsmay occur when several
automatic. When thelight sensor reads darkness outside, of the following are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog
the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Backlighting lamps, rear window defogger, high blower fan, heated
to the instrument panel will
also turn on.
seats and engine cooling fans.
2-45
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher
RPM setting, some electrical
loads will automaticallybe reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to
Mirrors
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm as
they usuallydo and the fan blower may cut back to a
lower speed. For more battery saving information, see
“Battery Saver Active Message” in the Index.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
I
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage door
opener. When the ignition is turned
off, the power to
these features will automatically
turn off after
10 minutes. Power will be restored
for an additional
Your vehicle has an automatic electrochromicdayhight
10 minutes if any dooris opened, the trunk is opened or rearview mirror.
the courtesy lamp switchis turned on.
When this featureis turned on, the mirror automatically
changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you.
A
photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark
outside. Another photocell built into the mirror
face
senses when headlamps are behind you.
2-46
At night, when the glare istoo high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced.
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
with Compass (IfEquipped)
Your vehicle may have anelectrochromic inside
rearview mirror with a compass.
Mirror Operation
To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press AUTO.
To turn off automatic dimming, press OFF. The
indicator light will be illuminated when this feature
is active.
L
1
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
When set in theMIRROR position, this mirror
automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you.
The mirror also includes an eight-point Cti~pa"ssdisplay
in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar Compass Operation
material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray
Press theCOMPASS switch once to turn the compass on
glass cleaner directlyon the mirror as that may cause the or off.
liquid cleaner toenter the mirror housing.
When the ignition andthe compass feature are on, the
Mirror Operation
compass will show two character boxes
for
approximately
two
seconds.
After
two
seconds, the
The right sideof the switch locatedat the bottomof the
mirror will display the compass heading.
off. To
mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and
turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
MIRROR.
Compass Calibration
To turn off automatic dimming, pressMIRROR again.
The indicator light will be illuminated when this feature If, after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (“N’ for North, for example), there
is active.
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
Time Delay
compass. Such interference may be caused
by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
“C” should ever
similar magnetic item. If the letter
to
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back
appear in the compass window, the mirror
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing
of
needs calibration.
the mirroras you drive underlights and through traffic.
The mirror can be calibrated in one
of two ways:
Cleaning the Photocells
Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean
the
until the display reads a direction, or
photocells when necessary.
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
2-48
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
Compass Variance
on the following zone map.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance
cross-country trip,it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance the
is difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance,
your compass couldgive false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMPASS button located atthe bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button until a zone
number appears inthe display.
4. Press the COMPASS buttonon the bottom of the
mirror untilthe new zone number appears in
the
display. Afteryou stop pressing the button, the
display will show a “C” and will need recalibration.
2-49
PowedHeated Remote Control Mirror
Your vehicle has a remote
mirror control locatedon
the driver’s door armrest.
Move thelefthight select
switch located beneaththe
mirror control to choose the
right or left mirror.
Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust
for
the glareof headlamps behind you. This feature is
controlled by the on and off settings on the
electrochromic mirror. See “ElectrochromicDaymight
Rearview Mirror” in the Index.
Convex Outside Mirror
To adjust the mirror, move the arrow control in the
go. Leave the lefuright
direction you want the mirror to
select switch in the center position to disable mirror
movement by the four-arrow control switch. This is
helpful in preventing unwanted mirror movement in
case the controlis accidentally bumped while driving.
Adjust each outside mirror so
the vehicle is barely
visible in the mirror to maximize your side view.
The mirrors can also be programmed
for personalizauon
and parallel parking feature
if you havethe optional
memory package. For more information, see “Memory
Seat and Mirrors” and “Memory and Personalization
Features” in the Index. For infomation on the heated
outside mirrors, see “Rear Window Defogger’’ in
the Index.
2-50
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from
the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a
dimming feature.
A CAUTIC) r:
I
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
you
If you cut too sharply into the right lane,
could hit a vehicle
on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Curbview Assist Mirror(If Equipped)
Storage Compartments
If your vehicleis equipped withmemory mirrors, it will
mirror feature.
also be equipped with the curbview assist
This feature will cause the passenger mirror to tip when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).This feature is
especially useful in allowing you to view
the curb when
you are parallel parking.If further adjustmentis needed
after the mirroris tipped, the mirror switch may be used
to adjustthe mirror. If the mirror switch is pressed while
the passenger mirror is tipped,
the mirror will move in
that direction, but will return its
to original position once
the vehicle is shifted outof REVERSE (R).
Glove Box
Once the shift lever
is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a five second delay has occurred,
the passenger side
mirror will return toits original position.
To program the feature, see “Curbview Assist Mirror”in
the Index.
The glove boxis located infront of the passenger’s seat.
To lock the glove box door,insert the master key into
the lock cylinder and
turn it to the right. Turn
the key to
the left to unlock the door.
Map Pocket
The mapktorage pocketsare located on each front door as
well as on the passenger’s and driver’s front seatbacks.
Center Console StorageArea
Rear StorageArmrest
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear seatarmrest which
includes an open storage compartmentand a dual
cupholder that unfolds for use. To open, lift the
front edge.
Convenience Net
The conveniencenet is inside the backwall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keepthem from falling over during sharp
turns or
quick startsand stops.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them inthe
trunk as far forward asyou can. When not using the net,
hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sillplate.
Your vehicle isequipped with a full front consolewith
shift lever.
The console comeswith a storage tray, a storage
compartment for CDs or tapes, a dual cupholder that
unfolds, an optional phone and an armrest. The
cupholder can be opened by pressing on the surface
panel located in front of the armrest. Closethe lid
to secure.
2-52
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
(Option)
The ashtrays and cigarette lighters may be ordered
through your dealer.To use the ashtray, press onthe
cover of the console located below the climate control
system to reveal thefront ashtray. To clean the ashtray,
lift it out by pulling on the snuffer.
To use the rear ashtray,
lift the lid. For more
information, see your dealer.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
Note that power to the cigarette lighter will shut
off
10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff. This helps to
prevent battery drainage. For more information, see
‘?nadvertent Power Battery Saver”in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
If you do, it won’t be able to
while it is heating.
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
Swing downthe visor to block out glare.It can be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side.
When moved tothe side, the sun visor will also move
forward and rearward. The sun visors also slide to block
The front cigarette lighter is located near the ashtray. sunlight when needed.
The sunshades are equipped with
Press it all the way in and release. It will pop back by a storage
flap that can be used for small items such as
itselfwhenit’sready
to light. You mayalsohaveatolltickets.
lighter on the backof the center console near the rear
There is also a secondary visor attached separately to
seat air outlet.
the headliner.
2-53
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Remote Door unlock
Turn the sunshade downand lift the cover to
see the
mirror. Move the slide switch up or downto brighten or
Theft DetectiodNotification and
Stolen-Vehicle Tracking
dim the lamp.
Automatic Notification of Frontal Air Bag
Deployment
Cellular TeleI '>one (Option)
Concierge/Customer Convenience Services
Your vehicle has been prewlredfor dealer installationof
a dual-mode (analog/digital) cellular telephone. A fixed For more information, contact your dealer.
mobile or a portable hand-held system are available.
Either system has steering wheel telephone controls and Assist Straps
information output throughthe DIC. Voice activation
An assist strap above each door can be used when
and hands-free operation are standard features. For more getting outof your vehicle.
A user's guide is
information, contact your dealer.
provided with the telephone.
Garment Hooks
OnStar System (Option)
This system may be ordered through your dealer if you
have the optional fixed cellular telephone. The
24 hours a day:
following services are available
0
Roadside Service with Location
Emergency Services Button
2-54
For your convenience,a garment hookis attached to the
rear assist strap.
Floor Mats
Your vehicleis equipped with rubber-backed front and
rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and
using a spot cleaner,if necessary. Do not machine wash.
Express Sunroof (Option)
There are two control
switches to operate the
sunroof. The control
switches work only when
the ignition is on or when
the ignitionis off and the
Retained Accessory Power
is active.
The roof switch has
positions for opedclose
and express open. The
vent switch has positions
for vent opedclose.
Press and hold the roof switch rearward to first
the
position to open the glass panel and sunshade.
The
sunshade can also be opened or closed by hand.
To close
and hold the roof switch forward.
the glass panel, press
Press and release the roof switch rearward
to the second
If you want to
position to express open the glass panel.
stop the glass panelin a partially open position, press
either switchin any direction. Note that if you press and
hold the roof switch in the express open position for more
than one second, thesunroof will operate manually.
To vent, press and hold the vent switch.
The sunshade
must be opened by hand.To close, press and hold the
vent switch.
2-55
Universal Transmitter (Option)
The transmitter will learn and transmit
the frequencies
of most current transmitters andis powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must acceptany interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
This device complies with
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause interference, and(2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
by other than
Changes and modifications to this system
This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions an authorized service facility could void authorization to
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It will use this equipment.
operate garage doors and gates, or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency
such as home/office lighting systems.
2-56
Programming the Transmitter
Do not usethe universal transmitter with any
garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Turn the ignition off while programming the transmitter.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed toStep 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the light onthe transmitter beginsto flash
rapidly (approximately20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settingsfor all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want
to program.
3. Hold the endof the hand-held transmitter against the
front surface of the universal transmitterso that you
can still see the amber light.
4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on
the universal
transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through
Step 5.
5. Hold down both buttons until you see thelight on
the universal transmitter flash slowly and then
rapidly. The rapid flashing, which could take up to
90 seconds, indicates that the universal transmitter
has been programmed. Release both buttons once
the
light starts to flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
If you still cannot
hand-held transmitter is not dead.
program it,rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work
with older garage door openers that
do not meet current
If you cannot
Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult
your dealer.
Training a Garage Door Opener with
“Rolling Codes”(If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmedthe hand-held
transmitter tothe universal transmitter, see
“Programming the Transmitter” inthe Index. If you
you need to train the
have completed this programming,
garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal
transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s
manual for the proper transmitter training procedure
for
your garage door opener brand.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
universal transmitter. You may either use the universal
transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to open the
garage door.
If after following these instructions you
still have
problems trainingthe garage door opener, consult
your dealer.
Erasing Chan---
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the red light begins
to flash.
1. Locate the training buttonon the garage door opener
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
receiver. The exact location and color
of the button
reprogrammed using the procedurefor programming the
may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have transmitter explained earlier.
difficulty locatingthe training button, refer to your
garage door opener manual.
Accessories
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
two seconds. A light indicator will
receiver for one or
begin to flash when the receiver enters the train mode.
Accessories for the universal transmitterare available
from the manufacturerof the unit. If you would like
15.
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35
3. Return to the universal transmitterin your vehicle
and pressthe universal transmitter button you have
already programmed for two to three seconds. Press
the button again to make sure that the universal
transmitter has been trained to the garage door
opener receiver. Check thatthe train was successful.
The receiver light should no longer be flashing.
2-59
h
The Instrument Panel:Your Information System
2-60
The instrument panelis designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’ll know howfast
of the other things you’ll need know
to
to drive safely and
you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many
economically. The main components of the instrument panel are:
13.
Outlets 1. Air
Door Release
2. Driver
Information
Center
Control
Buttons
14. Trunk
Release
15. HVAC
Controls
Wheel
Steering
SignaVLights
3. Turn
6.
4. Cluster
Horn
5. Windshield Wiperwasher Lever
17. Audio
Steering
Wheel
Controls
Switch
Heater
Seat 18. Lever
6.
Control
Cruise
ontrol
Traction 19.
Switch
7. Ignition
Vent
8. Air
20. Console Shift Lever
Dial
Control
9. Hazard
Warning
Button
Radio
10.
Controls
11. Lamp
12. Hood Release
Convenience
2 1.
Controls
Climate
22. Electronic
23. Glove Box
Storage/Optional
Ashtray
Cluster
TEMP
ON
6
$0 -$-
o(
a
SOON
SECURITY
United States version shown, Canadian similar
2-62
a
CRUISE
6
TRACTION
CONTROL
AIR
BAG
Speedometer and Odometer
Press the topof the buttonto reset the odometers. For
information on resetting these buttons,see “Control
Buttons” in the Index.
The speedometer lets yousee your speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer
shows howfar your vehicle has been driven, in either miles Display Mode
(used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
This button is located between the trip odometer button
You may wonder what happens ifa vehicle hasto have a
and theEnglishMetric display button. PressDSPL
new odometer installed. The new one may read the correct MODE to turn the backlighting and the digital speed
mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer has
image on and off.
stored the mileage in memory.
EnglisWetric Display
Trip Odometer
There are two trip
odometers, which are
indicated by TripA
and Trip B.
In order to switch from oneto the other, press theAh3
portion of the button. By pressingthis button, you can tell
A
how many miles you have traveled on either your Trip
or Trip B odometer sinceyou last set the odometer back
to zero.
You can go back andforth
from English (miles) to
metric (kilometers)by
pressing this button.
Other readings suchas temperature, fuel and trip
odometer also go back and forth between English
and metric.
2-63
Engine Speed Limiter
Vehicle Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the enginefrom operating at too
This feature prevents your vehicle from exceeding
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
speeds thatthe tires are not rated for. When this
rpm are critically high, the
fuel supply to the engine is
happens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut
off. When the
vehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again.shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply
will come on again. This helps prevent damage to
Tach neter
the engine.
This gage indicates the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will helpyou
locate them.
is
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
wrong beforeit becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also
save you or
others from injury.
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red area or engine damage may
occur.
2-64
Warning lights come on when there may beisor
a
problem with oneof your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.
If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be
or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to
let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when
one of the gages shows
there may bea problem, checkthe section that tells you
what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
“Driver Information Center”in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned toON or START, a chime will
come onfor about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If the
driver’s beltis already
buckled, neitherthe chime
on.
nor the light will come
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness lightthe
oninstrument
panel, which showsAIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if thereis an electrical problem.The system
check includes the air bag sensors, air
thebag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more informationon the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
2-6 -
-
Charging system Indicator Light
This lightgoes on when you
turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you
start your engine.
United States
Canada
This light will come on when you start your engine, and
If it doesn’t
it will flashfor a few seconds. Then the light should go That’s a check to be sure the light works.
come on, be sure to have
it fixed so it will be there to
is ready.
out. This means the system
warn you if something goes wrong.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag If this light stayson, you need service and you should
take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash
for a few
to ON. If the
seconds when you turn the ignition key
so it will be
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
ready to warn you if thereis a problem.
2-66
Brake System Warning:
It
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake sy; m is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other partcan
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warninglight comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light should comeon
briefly when you turnthe
ignition key to ON. If it
doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on whileyou are driving, pulloff the
is
road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedal
go closer to the floor.
harder to push. Or, the pedal may
It may take longer to stop.If the lightis still on, have the
vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
,aCAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Parking Brake Indicator Light
PARK
(@I
This light comes on when
the parking brake isset, and
it will stay on if the parking
brake does not fully release.
If you try to drive off with
the parking brake set, this
light will remainon.
This light should alsocome on briefly asyou start the
vehicle. If it doesn’t, have thelight fixed so it will be
ready to remind youif the parking brake has not fully
released. For more information on how to release the
parking brake, see “Parking Brake” in
the Index.
2-67
Anti-Lock BrakeSyste~
--
-
arning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
Traction ControlSystem Warning Light
TRACTION
CONTROL
Canada States United
If the light stayson, turn the ignitionto OFF. Or, if the
as
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
This warning light should comeon briefly as you start
possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine
the engine.If the warninglight doesn’t come on then,
again to reset the system. If the light
still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you’re
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock driving, theremay be a problem with your traction
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also control system and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning lightis on, the system will not limit
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
problem withyour regular brakes.See “Brake System
Warning Light” in the Index.
The traction control system warning light
may come on
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come for the following:
on briefly when you turn the ignition keyON.
to If the
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
light doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be
related to traction control, the traction control system
ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
will turn off and the warning light will come on.
2-68
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period
of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
-IF-TEMP
c
.
w
This light tells you that the
engine has overheated.You
should stop the car and turn
the engineoff as soon
as possible.
A warning chime should also sound if this light comes
on. As a check, the light should come on for a few
seconds whenyou start your engine.In the section
“Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the
engine is too hot.
That reading means the same thing
as the warning
In the section
light -- the engine coolant has overheated.
“Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-69
I NOTICE:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is calledOBD 11(On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto
assure that emissionsare at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINESOON light
comes on to indicate that there
is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by the
system before any problemis apparent. This may prevent
more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, asa check to show youit is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If so, reinstall thefuel cap, making sure to fully install
if the fuel
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A looseor
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly
installed should turnthe light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof
cargo being hauled as soon itasis possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If
the LightIs On Steady” following.
If the light continues toflash, when it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the keyoff, wait at least10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady,see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. Ifthe light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drivethe vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service centerfor service.
Did youjust drive through a deep puddle
of water?
The condition
If so, your electrical system may be wet.
will usually be corrected when
the electrical system
the light off.
dries out.A few driving trips should turn
Are you low onfuel?
As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your enginemay
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts
of
air are sucked into thefuel line causing a misfire.The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly.
It
will take afew driving trips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands
of fuel?
If so, be sure tofuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see Oil Pressure Light
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
This light tells you
if there
You may
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
could be a problem with
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
your engine oil pressure.
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.)
This will be detected by
the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more
of these conditions,
ON or
The light goes on when you turn yourtokey
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
a
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s
full tankof the properfuel to turn the lightoff.
check to be sure the light works.it If
doesn’t come on,
be sure to haveit fixed so it will be there towarn you if
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the something goes wrong.
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and When the lightcomes on and stuys on, it means
or electrical
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical
You
that oil isn’t flowing through your engine properly.
problems that may have developed.
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
2-72
A CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could beburned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
Security Light
SECURITY
For information
regarding this light,see
“Theft-Deterrent System”
in the Index.
Fog Lamp Light (STS Only)
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not coveredby
your warranty.
This light will comeon
when the fog lamp button
is pressed. For more
information about the fog
lamps, see “FogLamps” in
the Index.
2-73
Lights On Reminder Light
Fuel Gage
I
I
ON
b
E
United States
Canada
This is a telltale that comes on whenever the parking
lamps are on,so that you know your lights are on.
Cruise Control Light
CRUISE
This light comes on
whenever you set your
vehicle’s cruise control.
FUEL
United States
FUEL
Canada
The fuel gage shows approximately how
much fuel is in
the tank. It works only when the ignition
is in ON.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage.
All of these situationsare normal and do not indicate
that anythingis wrong.
0
At the gas station the gas pump shutsoff before the
gage reads F.
0
The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly or
accelerate quickly.
GAL FUEL USED on the Driver Information Center
does not correspond exactly the
to amount of fuel
remaining as shown onthe fuel gage.
Continuous Variable Road Sensing
Suspension (CVRSS)
The CVRSS automatically adjusts the
ride of your
vehicle. Automaticride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor
the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determinethe proper system response.If the
controller detects a problem within
the system, the DIC
will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYS message.
If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced
at
your dealership.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status
of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DICis also used to display driver
personalization features and warninghtatus messages.
Memory and Personalization Features
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have memory personalization.
Memory settings that have been previously programmed
(HVAC settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting
choices, remote confirmation choices, seat positions,
column positions,mirror and programmable automatic
door lock choices) can be recalled
by pressing the
unlock button on theRKE transmitter orby placing the
key in your vehicle’s ignition.
To begin programming,the ignition must be in ON, your
vehicle in PARK(P), and if your vehicle has memory,
press the appropriate memory button“1” or “2”, located
on the driver’s door panel, prior
to programming. Press
the INFO button one or more times untilthe FEATURE
PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the Driver
ON/OFF
Information Center (DIC) display. Press the
button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING.
To exit,
press the INFORESET button.
2-75
Remote Recall Memory(If Equipped)
Auto Exit Seat(If Equipped)
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one
or more
times until theREMOTE RECALL MEMORY prompt
appears. To turnthe feature on, press the ON/OFF
button untilON is displayedon the DIC. The seat and
mirror memory settings that have been previously
programmed can be recalled by pressing the unlock
button on theRKE transmitter. The column will move
when the key is inserted in the ignition and moved to
ON. To turn the featureoff, press the ON/OFF button
until OFF is displayed.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
times until theAUTO EXIT SEAT prompt shows on the
DIC display. This feature will move the seat to the
driver’s exit position when the key is movedofout
ON
(away fromSTART) and the driver’s door is opened. To
turn this featureon, press the ON/OFF button until ON
appears on the DIC.To turn this feature off, press the
ON/OFF button untilOFF shows.
Auto Exit Steering Wheel
(If Equipped)
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
STRG WHEEL prompt
times until the AUTO EXIT
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
times until theKEY IN RECALL prompt appears on the This feature will move the column to the driver’s exit
position when the key is moved out of ON (away
from
DIC display.To turn the featureon, press the ON/OFF
START) and the driver’s dooris opened.
button until ON appears.The seat and mirror memory
settings that have been previously programmed will be
recalled when the keyis inserted in the ignition.The
column will move when the key
is moved to ON. To
turn the feature off, press the ON/OFF button until
OFF appears.
Key in Recall (If Equipped)
2-76
-
Remote Confirmation
Lights Flashat Lock
This personalizationfeature allows the driver to
program the parking lampsto blink or to remain off
RKE transmitter
when the lock or unlock buttons on the
are pressed and the horn to sound when the lock button
on theRKE transmitter is pressed. Press the INFO
button one or more times untilthe FEATURE
PROGRAMMING prompt appearson the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. Press the ON/OFF
button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING. Toexit,
press the INFO RESET button.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button
one or more
times until the LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK prompt
appears on the DIC display.To turn thefeature on, press
the ON/OFF button until ON appears.
If all the doors are
closed, the parking lamps will blink once when the lock
button on the RKE transmitteris pressed. The lamps
will not flash ifthe manual parklamp switchis active.
To turn thefeature off, press the ON/OFF button until
OFF appears.
Horn Sounds atLock
Press the down arrow onthe INFO button one or more
Press the down arrow on
the INFO buttonone or more
times until the HORN SOUNDS
AT LOCK prompt
times until the LIGHTS FLASH
AT UNLOCK prompt
appears on the DIC display. To turn the feature
on, press
appears. To turn thisfeature on, press theON/OFF
the ON/OFF button until ON appears.
If all the doors are
closed, the horn will
chirp once when the lock button on
button until ON is displayed on the DIC. If all the doors
are closed,the parking lamps will blink twice when
the
the RISE transmitter is pressed. To turn the feature off,
OFF appears.
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. To turn press the ON/OFF button until
the feature off, press theON/OFF button until theOFF
prompt appears.
Lights Flash atUnlock
2-77
Exterior Lighting
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Press the INFO button one or more times until the
This personalization feature enables the driver
to
program the exterior lamps to turn on or to remain off FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the
when using the RKE transmitter to unlock the vehicle. DIC display. Press the ON/OFF buttonto enter
FEATURE PROGRAMMING.To exit, press the INFO
During darkor nighttime conditions,if exterior lighting
RESET button.
is selected, the parking lamps, taillamps, reverse lamps,
high-beam headlamps, etc. will turn onfor about
Doors Lock in Gear
20 seconds or until a door
is opened, until the key is
Press the down arrow on the INFO button
one or more
turned out ofOFF or until the RKE is used to lock
times until the DOORS LOCK
IN GEAR prompt
the vehicle.
appears. This feature will automatically lock all doors
Press the INFO buttonone or more times until the
when the vehicleis shifted outof PARK (P). To turn the
FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the
feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. Press the
DIC. To turn the featureoff, press ON/OFF untilOFF
ON/OFF button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING. is displayed.
To exit, press the INFO RESET button. Press the down
arrow on the INFO button one or more times until the
Driver Unlock inPARK (P)
EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK prompt appears.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
To turn the feature on, press
the ON/OFF button until
times until theDRIVER UNLOCK INPARK (P)
ON is displayed. To turn the feature off, press the
prompt appears. This feature will automatically unlock
ON/OFF button untilOFF is displayed.
only the driver’s door when the vehicle
is shifted into
PARK (P). To turn the feature on, press ON/OFF until
ON is displayed on the DIC.
To turn thefeature off,
press ON/OFF untilOFF is displayed.
2-78
Driver Unlock KeyOff
Curbview Assist Mirror (If Equipped)
Press the down arrowon the INFO button one or more
times untilthe DRIVER UNLOCKKEY OFF prompt
appears. Thisfeature will automatically unlock only
the
driver’s door whenthe ignition keyis moved to OW. To
turn the feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed
on the DIC. To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until
OFF is displayed.
Press the down arrow onINFO
the button one or more times
until the MIRROR TO CURB
IN REV prompts appears on
the DIC display.This feature will move the passenger’s
outside rearview mirrorto a curb view position when the
in REVERSE (R) and it will return
console shifter is placed
the mirror to thelast known driving position when the
turn this
console shifter is moved out of REVERSE To
(R).
feature on, press
the ON/OFF button untilON is displayed on
the DIC. Toturn the featureoff, press the ON/OFF button
untilOFF is displayed. For more information, see “Curbview
Assist Mirror”in the Index.
Doors Unlock inPARK (P)
Press the down arrow
on the INFO button one or more
times untilthe DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK prompt
appears. This feature will automatically unlock all doors
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). To turn the
feature on, pressON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
DIC. To turn thefeature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
Doors Unlock KeyOff
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
KEY OFF prompt
times until the DOORS UNLOCK
appears. This feature will automatically unlock all doors
when the ignition keyis turned toOFF. To turn the
feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
DIC. To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
Driver’s Names Set/Recall(If Equipped)
After the FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt is
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the ON/OFF button is pressed, the prompts DRIVER
NO 1 or DRIVERNO 2 will appear. These prompts
correspond to which RKE transmitter button or memory
recall button has been pressed on RKE
the transmitter.
You may have your name and a second driver’s name
displayed here replacingthe prompts DRIVER NO 1
and DRIVER NO 2. A dealership can program your
vehicle to display the names you want.
The names will
is turned to ON only
appear whenever the key position
if RKE transmitters 1 or 2 are usedto enter the vehicle
or buttons 1 or 2 on the driver’s door are pressed.
2-79
Comfort Controlsand Radio System Personalization
These features allow both drivers
to personalize their
own climate control settingsas well as their radio
settings. For more information,
see “Climate Control
Personalization” and “Radio Personalization” in
the Index.
The outside temperature is always available
for display
when your vehicle is running unless an overriding
Driver Information Center message appears.
You can
change the temperaturefrom Fahrenheit to Celsius by
pressing the ENGMET (EnglisWmetric) button on the
instrument panel. For more information on the Driver
Information Center,see “Driver Information Center
Messages” in the Index.
The electronic sensor canbe affected by roador engine
heat during idling, slow driving
or when the engineis
first stared after a short trip. In order to ensure proper
automatic climate control operation, the outside air
temperature displaymay not update as quickly as
expected. This is to allow theair surrounding the outside
temperature sensorto be as close to the actual outside
conditions as possible. This is determined by how much
time has elapsed since the vehicle has been turned off
and by vehicle speed.
2-80
Control Buttons
RESET TRIPAB:By
using this button, you can
tell how far.you’ve gone
since you last set the trip
reset back to zero.To reset,
press and hold the button
until zeros appear.
If your vehicle is domestic, the trip odometer will return
to zero after 999.9 miles(1 609 km). If your vehicle is
return to zero after
Canadian, the trip odometer will
1 999.9 km (1,242 miles).The TRIP RESET button only
(A or B) that is being displayed.
resets the trip odometer
Each trip odometer hasto be reset individually.
RANGE: This message shows approximately how
many miles you can drive without refilling your fuel
tank. Oncethe range drops below40 miles remaining,
the display will showLOW.
INFO: Pressing this button up or down will display the
OUTSIDE TEMP, RANGE, MPG AVG, MPG INST,
GAL FUEL USED,AVG MPH, TIMER, B A m R Y
VOLTS, ENGINE OIL LIFE, TRANS FLUID LIFE,
PHONE (if equipped) andFEAPROGRAMMING.
INFO RESET Pressing this button will reset
the MPG
AVG, GAL FUEL USED, MPH
AVG, TIMER,
ENGINE OIL LIFE and TRANS FLUID LIFE.
For
more information aboutthe trip odometer, see
“Odometer” in the Index.
MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), then press and
hold the INFO RESET button until
0.0 MPG AVG
is displayed.
GAL FUEL USED (Reset):Press the INFO button to
display the GAL FUEL USED on the
DIC, then press
0.0 GAL FUEL
and hold the INFO RESET button until
USED is displayed.
AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the AVG MPH (Average Speed), then press and hold the
INFO RESET button until0.0 AVG MPH is displayed.
TIMER: This feature is like a stopwatch, in that you
can clock the time
it takes to get fromone point
to another.
To operate, press theINFO button to display TIMER.
Each of the fields for the hours, minutes and seconds are
two numeric digits.
2-8 1
Once TIMER 0O:OO:OO is displayed, press theON/OFF
button to startthe timing feature. Press the ON/OFF
button again to stop it.
If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip
for instance, the
TIMER feature will automatically start timing whereit
left off when you last stopped.To reset it, press and hold
the INFO RESET button until the display reads TIMER
0O:OO:OO. Press the INFO buttonto exit from the
TIMER function.
Driver Information Center Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed
are first
in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that
sold in Canada will have a number after each message.
This number helps to identify the message which is only
displayed in English.
-
BATTERY NOT CHARGING 7: This message will
appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the
ENGINE OIL LIFE (Reset):Press the INFO button to electrical system checked by your dealership at your
earliest convenience.
the
display the ENGINE OIL LIFE, then press and hold
INFO RESET button until100%ENGINE OIL LIFEis
BATTERY SAVERACTIVE 27: This message is
displayed. (This only needs to be reset after you have displayed when the vehicle has detected that the battery
had the oil changed.)
voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable point.
The
battery saver system willstart reducing certain features
Transmission FluidLife Monitor: Under normal
of the vehicle that you may not be able
to notice. At the
conditions, the rateof deterioration of the transmission
point that features are disabled, this message is
fluid is slow. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for
the vehicle is trying
proper fluid and change intervals. Press the INFO button displayed. It is used to convey that
off unnecessary
to
save
the
charge
in
the
battery.
Turn
to display the TRANS FLUID LEFT, then press and
accessories to allow the battery to recharge.
hold the INFO RESET button until100% TRANS
FLUID LEFT is displayed. (This only needs to be reset
after you have had the fluid changed.)
ENGMET: Press this button to display information in
the English (miles)or metric (kilometers) system.
-
2-82
-
-
CHANGE BRAKE PADS 125: This messageis used
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 8: This message shows
that the electrical charging system is overcharging (more to notify you that the brake pads may have worn down.
than 16 volts).To avoid being stranded, have the electrical A sensor is connected to the brake pads and is triggered
when they wear toa certain point. Have the front and
system checked by your dealership.You can reduce the
rear brakes serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
charging overload by using the accessories.Turn on the
lamps and radio, set the climate control onAUTO and the
CHANGE TRANSFLUID 47: This message will
fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on.
appear when it is time to replace the transaxle fluid. See
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the Maintenance Schedule booklet for the proper fluid
the INFiO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
and change intervals.
when the engine is running.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID 37: This message will
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 6: This message will
display if the ignitionis in ON to inform the driver that
appear when the electrical system
is charging less than
the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system
9 volts orif the battery has been drained. If this message serviced by a technician as soon as possible. See “Brake
appears immediately after starting, is
it possible that the
System Warning Light” in the Index.
generator can still recharge the battery. The battery
should recharge while driving but may take a few hoursCHECK COOLANT LEVEL 2: This message will
appear when thereis a low levelof engine coolant. Have
to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger
(be sure to
the
cooling system servicedby a technician as soon
follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to boost the
as possible.
battery after returning home or
to a final destination.If
this message appears while driving
or after starting your
CHANGE ENGINEOIL 82: This means that the life
vehicle and stays on, have
it checked immediately to
of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed
determine the causeof this problem. To help the
within 200 miles. See “Engine Oil” and “Filter
generator recharge the battery quickly, you can reduce Recommendations” in the Maintenance Schedule
the load on the electrical system by turning
off the
booklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must
accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC be reset. See “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index
on how to
by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 reset it.
to 15.5 volts.
-
-
-
-
-
2-83
-
CHECK FUEL GAGE 50: This message will appear
when the fuel supply is
less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and
the display is turned off. A single chime will also sound
when this messageis displayed.
-
CHECK GAS CAP 61: This message will appear if
-
DRIVER DOORAJAR 140: This message will
ON and your driver’s door
display anytime the key is in
is open or ajar.A chime will also sound when the
vehicle’s speed is greater than3 mph (4.8 km/h).
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2) :This message will appear
the gas cap has not been fully tightened.
You should
when the remote keyless entryis used. The message will
recheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened. show which driver is activating the personalization
feature. It will only stay on
for five seconds.
CHECK OIL LEVEL 36: For correct operationof
the low oil sensing system, your vehicle should be on a ENGINE COOLANT HOTIDLE ENGINE 44:
This message will appear when the engine coolant
level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message
may appear if the vehicle
is parked on grades.The oil
temperature is over262 OF ( 128O C). Stop and allow your
vehicle to idle inPARK (P) until it cools down and the
level sensing system does not check
for actual oil level
message is removed.Do not increase engine speed
off for a short periodof time, and
if the engine has been
the oil level is never sensed while the engine is running. above a normal idle.If it does not cool down, turn off
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears, and your the engine and haveit serviced before drivingit again.
Severe engine damage can result
from an overheated
vehicle has been parkedon level ground withthe engine
engine. See “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.
off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be
checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking ENGINE HOT-A/C OFF 16: This message displays
the oil level, be sure the engine has been for
off a few
when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal
minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
check the dipstick and add if
oilnecessary. See “Engine
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically
Oil” in the Index.
turned off. When the coolant temperature returns
to
-
-
-
-
CHECK WASHER FLUID 25: This message will
appear to indicate that you need washer solvent.
2-84
normal, theA/C operation will automatically resume.
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired as soon as
possible to avoid compressor damage.
-
--
ICE POSSIBLE 13: This message appears when
ENGINE MISFIRE EASE OFF GAS
the outside air temperatureis cold enough to create icy
PEDAL 114: An engine misfire has occurred. You’ll
road conditions.
need to easeoff the gas pedal.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE 42: This
LEFT REAR DOOR A JAR 142: The left rear door
message will appear when the engine has overheated. Stop is open or ajar when this message appears.
The ignition
and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine must be in the ON position for this message to display.
damage. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed
is
A multiple chime will also sound when
this message
greater than 3 mph (4.8 kmh).
is disp1ay.d.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE 35: If this
ENGINE POWER REDUCED 41: This message
message appears while theengine is running,stop the
informs you that the vehicle is reducing engine power
engine anddo not operateit until the cause of low oil
because the transaxleis being placed in gear under
pressure is corrected.Severe damage to the engine can
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s
result. A multiple chime will also sound when this
engine, transaxle or ability to accelerate.
message is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW 11: This message serves as a
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR 141: The passenger’s
warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low.
door or rear doors are open orajar when this message
Stop for fuel soon.A single chime will also sound when
appears. The ignition must be in
the ON position for this
this message is displayed.
message to display.A chime will also sound when the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED 23: If it’s dark enough
vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
outside and the headlamps and twilight sentinel control are
off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display
on theDIC. This message informs the driver that turning on
DRL the
are
the exterior lamps is recommended even though
still illuminated. It has become dark enough outside to
This
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
message willalso appear if the optional rainsense wiping
feature is on and the twilight sentinel off.
is
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RIGHT REARDOOR A JAR 143: The right rear
door is open or ajar when this message appears.
The key
must bein the ON position for this message to display.
A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed is
greater than3 mph (4.8 km/h).
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM 101: The PCM has
detected a problem within the fuel system when this
message appears. See your dealershipfor service.
SERVICE IDLE CONTROL 107: A problem with
this message displays.
the idle control has occurred when
SERVICE “AC” SYSTEM 14: This message appears
Take your vehicle to your dealership for service.
when the electronic sensors that control the air
SERVICE STABILITY SYS 54 :If you ever see the
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. SERVICE STABILITYSYS message, it means there
Have the climate control system serviced if you notice a may be a problem with your stability enhancement
drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system
SERVICE AIR BAG 83: There is a problem with the
(stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again). If
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (air bag) system when the SERVICE STABILITYSYS message still comes on,
it means there is a problem.You should see your dealer
this message appears. Let only a qualified technician
for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
work on your vehicle.See your dealership for service
A single chimewill also sound when this message
at once.
is displayed.
SERVICE CHARGINGSYS 102: This message will
display when a problem with the charging system has been SERVICE STEERING SYS 127: This message is
in
detected. Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. displayed when a problem has been detectedthe
Magnasteer variable effort steering system. Service
SERVICE ELECTRICALSYS 106: This message
will displayif an electrical problem has occurred within is required.
SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYS 84: This message is
the PCM or the ignition switch. Have your vehicle
displayed to indicate that the suspension system
is not
serviced by your dealership.
operating properly.To correct this problem, have your
vehicle serviced at your dealership.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TM
-
2-86
-
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM 34: This message
means there is a problem in the Personalized
Automotive Security System (PASS-Key111).A fault
has been detected inthe system which means that
the
PASS-Key I11 system is disabled andis not protecting
the vehicle.The vehicle usually restarts, however, you
may want to takeyour vehicle to a proper service center
before turning off the engine.
-
SERVICE TRANSMISSION 100: See your dealer
for repair.
SERVICE VEHICLESOON 3: This message is
displayed when a non-emissions related powertrain
malfunction occurs.Have your vehicle serviced bya
technician as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO 90 113: A failure in the
suspension control system has occurred when this
message appears.The PCM determines the speed to
which your vehicle is limited. Have your vehicle
serviced if this message appears.
-
-
-
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED 55 :You may see the
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver
Information Center.It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continueto go in the direction in which you’re
steering. This stability enhancement system activates
when the computer senses that your vehiclejust
is
starting to spin,as it might if you hit a patchof ice or
other slippery spot on the road. When the system
is on,
you may hear a noise orfeel a vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on,
you should continueto steer in the direction you want to
go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or
other difficult driving situations by making
the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know that
so
something has caused your vehicle to start to spin,
you should consider slowing down.
STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY 33: This
message will appear when the Personalized Automotive
Security System (PASS-Key111) senses that an improper
ignition key is being used totry to start the vehicle.
Check the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it
may need to be replaced.If you see no damage, remove
the key and try to start the vehicle again. Ifit still does
not start,try another ignition key.
-
2-87
-
THEFT ATTEMPTED 40: This message is
displayed if the theft system has detected a break-in
attempt while you were away fromyour vehicle.
-
TOP SPEED FUEL CUT-OFF 111: This message
will appear when thePCM senses that the maximum
speed for your vehicle has been reached. The speed
of
your vehicle will surge as the fuel supply
is cutoff. This
allows your vehicle to stay in
a safe tire operating range.
The top speed is
set based on the top speed rating
of
the tires.
-
TRACTION READY 90: This message informs the
driver that the traction control system
is available. This
occurs when the tractionordoff button on the console has
been returned to ON (pressing the button onceturns the
traction control systemoff: pressing the button againturns
the system back on).This message will automatically
disappear from the display after five seconds.
-
TRACTION SUSPENDED 56: This message
displays when the traction control system has been
temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes have
overheated. This message does not indicate a problem
TRACTION ENGAGED 91 :When your traction
with your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few
control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION
minutes, the traction control system will be available
ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slippery road
again and the TRACTIONREADY message
conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so
will appear.
adjust your driving accordingly.
This message will stay
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE 112: This message
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
in your vehicle is too
indicates that the transaxle fluid
stops limiting wheel spin.
hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until
it cools
TRACTION OFF 89: This message will be displayed
down or until this message is removed.
after the traction control has been turned
off by the
TRUNK OPEN 24: This message indicates that the
button on the center console.
trunk is open when the ignition is on.
-
-
-
-
-
TURN SIGNAL ON 20: This message is a reminder,
after driving about a mile, that you have the turn signal
on. A multiple chime will also soundwhen this message
is displayed.
2-88
Oil Life Indicator
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It's based on the engineoil temperatures and your
driving patterns.To see the display, press the INFO
button several times until ENGINE
OIL LIFE appears.
If you see 99%ENGINE OIL LIFE, 99 percent of your
current oillife remains.
The system should indicate changing the oil between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
It may indicate changing the oil before
3,000 miles
(5 000 km) depending on your driving habits.
If the
vehicle has been driven7,500 miles (12 500 km), it will
indicate to changethe oil. If you drivein a dusty area,
3,000 miles
you should change your oil every
(5 000 km) or three months (whichever comes
first)
unless the display indicates changingit sooner.
When the oil is changed,you'll need to reset the system.
To reset, display the Oil Life Indicator
by pressing the
INFO button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET
button until the display shows100% ENGINE
OIL LIFE.
The DIC may display a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL
message. Always keep a written record
of the mileage
and date when you changed your oil.For more
information, see the Maintenance Schedule booklet.If
you see CHANGE ENGINE OIL, it means the oil lifeis
gone andyou should changethe oil right away. The
system doesn't check how much oil you have, so you'll
still have to checkfor that. To see how, see "Engine Oil"
in the Index.
2-89
b
2-90
NOTES
#z=
-.\
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section,you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-6
3-6
3 -6
3-7
3-8
3- 10
3- 10
3-11
3-1 1
3-11
3-16
3-20
Comfort Controls
Climate Control Panel
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defrosting and Defogging
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)
'
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc' Player (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and DigitalSignal Processing
(DSP) (If Equipped)
3-29
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-42
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-45
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc' Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing(DSP)
(If Equipped)
Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
Console-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
CD Adapter Kits
Radio Personalization (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your CompactDisc Player
Diversity Antenna System
3-1
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your electronic climate control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
Climate Control Panel
1
Personalization feature, you will be able to program
your preferred climate control settings by using your
remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Climate Control
Personalization” later in this section.
AUTO: The AUTO button will turn on the system
and automatically adjust the fan blower speed, air
delivery mode and temperature to your previously
programmed settings.
TEMP: This knob adjusts the air temperature coming
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-zone electronic
climate control system. This system can automatically
adjust and control temperature, fan speed, air delivery
mode, air conditioning Operation and air intake. YOU Can
use the AUTO (automatic) setting or override the
automatic operation by manually altering the controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Climate Control
3-2
through the system. Turn the TEMP knob to the right
to increase the temperature and to the left to decrease
the temperature. You may also press the TEMP knob to
turn the system on and off. (You can turn the comfort
control system on by pressing any button on the panel.
The passenger’s TEMP knob only turns off the system
of the passenger’s side.) Once the system is turned off,
fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle,
and the system will try to maintain the previously
set temperature.
Driver’s Side TemperatureKnob
youcan control the temperature of the driver’s side
independently from the passenger’s side. Turn the
driver’s side TEMP knob to the right to increase the
temperature and to the left to decrease the temperature.
Passenger's Side TemperatureKnob
The right front passenger can control the temperature
of
air for that area. (The passenger and driver knobs adjust
60 " F ( 16" C) to 90" F (32" C) independent of each
other. It is suggested, however, that the passenger's
setting stayno more thanfour degrees warmer or cooler
in temperature fromthe driver's setting.) To turn the
system on, press the passenger's side TEMP button.
Turn the passenger's side TEMP knob the
to right to
increase the temperature andto the left to decrease the
temperature. Pressthe passenger's side TEMP knob
again to turn off the passenger's
side system. If the
passenger's side is turned off, the driver's side will
control the temperatureof the entire vehicle.
Automatic Operation
When the system is set for automatic operation, sensors
will control theair delivery mode. Air will comefrom
the floor, the instrument panel
or windshield outlets. The
fan speed will vary asthe system maintainsthe selected
temperature setting.
Be careful not to put anything over the electronic solar
of the instrument panel
sensors located near the ends
near the windshield. These sensors are used by the
automatic system to regulate temperature.
To find your comfort zone,start with the 75°F (24°C)
setting and allow about30 minutes for the systemto
regulate. Turn the TEMP knob to adjust the temperature
if necessary. If you choose 60°F (16"C), the system
will remain at that maximum cooling setting and will
not regulate fanspeed. If you choose 90°F (32"C), the
system will remain at that maximum heating setting
and will not regulate fan speed. Choosing either
maximum setting will not causethe system to heat
or cool any faster.
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor cycles when needed to cool the air. In cold
weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the
airflow will be directed out the
floor outlets. As the
interior temperature approaches a desired setting, the
blower speed will decrease.To maintain interior
to the instrument panel
comfort, the airflow may move
air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode). On bright
sunny days in cold weather, the aifflow may come out
of the air conditioning outlets( A X mode) to maintain
comfort and prevent stuffiness.
3-3
If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have itElectronic Solar Sensor
set on AUTO, the air will first flow out thefloor outlets
for a few seconds. This is normal. This is to remove hot
air from the air outlets.As the air is cooled, the airflow
will move through the air conditioning outlets.
To avoid blowing cold airin cold weather, the system
will start at reduced fan speeds until warm air
is
available. The lengthof reduction depends on the
outside air temperature, engine coolant temperature
As the
or the time since the engine was last started.
coolant warms up, the blower
fan speed will gradually
increase and air will flow from the heater outlets, with
some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under
most normal conditions.If you select defrost mode or a
manual fan speed, this function will be skipped.
If you leave your vehicle,the system will remember
the control setting the next time you start your engine,
except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition
cycle cancels recirculation. Defrost will change to
off and
automatic operation when the ignition is shut
then turned back on.
3-4
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation is
and
located near the endof the instrument panelnear
the windshield.
The climate control panel uses this information to
automatically makethe necessary temperature and
airflow adjustments to maintain your comfort.
The
climate control system may supply cooler air one
to side
of your vehicle, if that side is facing the sun. Be careful
not to put anything over
the sensor on topof the dash.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode, fan
speed, airinput and compressor operation using the
following controls.
and dehumidify the air inside
the vehicle. In the
automatic mode,the air conditioning compressor only
operates when the system determinesit is needed. The
A/C OFF function is not available inthe defrost mode.
MODE: Press this button(the right orleft arrow) to
DEFROST (FRONT): Press this button to quickly
deliver air through the floor, instrument panel or
remove fog or frost from the windshield. This setting
windshield outlets. The climate control system will stay
sends mostof the airflow tothe windshield with only a
in the selected mode until the MODE button, the
small amountto the floor outlets.
DEFROST button orthe AUTO buttonis pressed again.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
Press theleft or right arrow to cycle throughthe
the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle.
This is
following available modes.
A*
helpful when youare trying to cool the air quickly or
f
l Upper: This setting directs airflow through the
limit odors entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode,
Your vehicle is
the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool themiddle instrument panel outlets.
equipped with a driver’s side
lap cooler which will also
air. Pressing the recirculation button willchange the
come on when the upper vents are being used.
operation to a manual mode and
the air will recirculate
Le
off the
non-stop. Press this button again to turn
l f l Bi-Level: This setting directs airinto your vehicle
recirculation feature.If you noticethe windows fogging,
in two ways. Cool air
is directed to the upper portion
of
press the recirculation button toexit the recirculation
your body through thefour instrument panel outlets
mode. Recirculationis not available in the
defrost mode.
while warmed air is directed to
the floor.
N C : Press this button to turn the air conditioning
-e
compressor on andoff. When you pressthe button, an
7
. Defog: This setting directs air to the floor outlets
A/C OFF message appears onthe climate control panel’s and toward the windshield.
display. Press the button again and the air conditioner
will return to automatic control.
The system will cool
3-5
0
I#
Heater: This setting directs warmed air through
the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted
to the
windshield to minimize fogging.
8 FAN: The button with thefan symbol adjusts the
Heating
Adjust the interior temperatureto a comfortable level
and if the fan speed needs adjusting, press theorup
down arrow. Adjusting the fan speed will cancel the
cold air delay.
fan speed. Pressthe up arrow to increasefan speed and
Outside air will be brought in and sent through
the floor,
the down arrow to decrease fan speed. Press
the AUTO
air conditioning or bi-level outlets. The heater works
button to set the fan speed for automatic operation. If it
best if you keep your windows closed while using
it. In
is cold outside, the blower may not run in the maximum
automatic operation, your fan will not run at high speed
high fan speed right away. The system checks the
to minimize warm-up time.
temperature of the engine coolant to assure
it is warm
enough to provide heat. When the engine coolant is
warm, the controller allows the fan to gradually increase Defrosting and Defogging
to a higher speed. This prevents cold air from blowing Use defrost (FRONT) on cool and humid days to keep
the windshield and side windows clear. This setting will
into the passenger’s compartment. Selecting a manual
remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in
fan speed will override this feature.
extremely humidor cold conditions. If you desire to
Air Conditioning
have more air on your
feet, move the control to the
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot defog mode. You maydo this by pressing the right or
left arrow on theMODE button.
inside air escape. This reduces the time
it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed Press the fan button’s up or down arrow to control the
for the air conditioner to work
its best. Your A/C setting
blower speed. You may also adjust the temperature by
may be adjusted automaticallyor manually. It may also
turning the TEMPknob.
be set separately on the passenger’s side from the
Recirculation and theA/C OFF message are not
driver’s side.See “Climate Control Panel” earlier in
available inthe defrost mode.
this section.
3-6
.
Rear Window Defogger
The grid lines you see on
the rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
turn on the rear defogger.
With it, the rear window
and both outside rearview
mirrors are heated.
The system will automatically shut off after ten minutes.
If further defogging is desired, press the button again.
The system will automatically shut off after five minutes
for any activations after the first one.
Note that the lines along the top of the window are for
the diversity antenna and are not intended to defog the
rear window.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
I NOTICE:
Scraping the insideof your rear window could
cut and damage the heating grids. Your warranty
would not cover this damage. Don’t put decals
there because you might have
to scrape themoff.
3-7
Ventilation System
Rear Ventilation
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when
it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when
the heater or the air
conditioning fanis running.
OFF
The direction and quantityof airflow for the rear seats
can also be adjusted at the back
of the console. Heater
outlets are located under the front seatw tom the feet
of rear passengers.
The front outlets are located in the center and at each
side of the instrument panel.You can adjust the
direction of airflow by moving the center control levers
or you can stop the airflow by moving the control
dial
located on each outlet downward.
3-8
Move the fan lever to adjust the blower speed from
LO to HI. Adjust the knob to direct the air flow.
To
reduce airflow to the rear outlets, slide the fan lever
all the way to the left. Turning the
knob to OFF will
completely stop airflow, no matter where the fan
blower control is set.
~
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood andfront air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves).
The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging theinside of the windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps circulate air throughout
your vehicle.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed througha passenger
compartment filter, which is part
of a three-piece filter
system. The filter removes certain contaminants from
the air, including pollen and
dust particles. Reductions
in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty
areas, indicate thatthe filter needs to be replaced early.
The carbon-treated filter is located inside the air
control module, with an access panel underneath the
instrument panel near the accelerator pedal.
The
filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled
maintenance. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for replacement intervals. See your dealerfor details
on changing the filter.
Your vehicle will not be damaged you
if choose not to
replace thefilter once the oldone is removed. However,
the air will no longer be
filtered.
3-9
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Some heating and cooling
controls canbe adjusted at
the steering wheel. Other
touch controls operate some
audio controls. See “Audio
Steering Wheel Controls”
in the Index.
Climate Control Personalization
(If Equipped)
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest
climate control settings as adjusted the last time your
vehicle was operated. These settings include the set
temperatures for driver and passenger, air conditioning,
mode and fan speed. (This feature does not recall
recirculation or defrost modes.) This feature allows
two different drivers to store and recall their own
climate control settings. The settings recalled
by the
climate control systemare determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1”or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
TEMP: Press the up arrow on the control to increase the The number on the backof the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver1 or to driver2. After any button
temperature and the downarrow to decrease temperature.
is pressed on theRKE transmitter orthe key is placed
FAN: Press the up arrow on the control to increase in the ignition, the climate control settings will
the fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. automatically adjust to where they were last set.
The
settings can also be changed by briefly pressing buttons
1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
8
3-10
Audio Systems
Your Cadillac audio system has been designed to
operate easily and give yearsof listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out itofif you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system
can do andhow to operate allits controls, to be sure
you’re getting the mostout of the advanced engineering
that went into it.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player(If Equipped)
Setting the Clock
Press and holdHR or MN until the time display begins
to change. Release the button you
as get close to the
correct time.The time may be set anytime the
clock is
displayed. Thereis a two-second delay before the clock
goes into time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press theknob again to turn the system off.To
increase volume, turn theknob to the right.Turn it to
the left to decrease volume.
3-11
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc.
The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources
are
shown on the display. If a source
is being used, it will
be underlined onthe display. If noneof the audio
sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will
appear on the display. Press this button again or
BAND to switch back to
the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silencethe system. Press
it again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and six FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to selectA M , FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons
for more than two seconds untilyou hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds,the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
positions. Press this button
to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
is held at thefirst position for a few seconds,the radio
of
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio will go
this button tothe second position and releaseto seek to
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
the next higher or lower radio station.
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
station. Press SCAN again
to stop scanning. If a preset
scan radio stations.The radio will go to a station, stop
station has weak reception,the radio will not stopat
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
the preset station.
this button againto stop scanning.
3-12
Setting theTone
TONE: Press and releasethis button until the desired
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE) is
found. The radio keeps separatetone settings for each
band, each preset and each source.
LEVEL: After selectingthe desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
Adjusting the Speakers
4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE control
is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button toselect the desiredlevel.
Playing a CassetteTape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.The tape will
begin playingas soon as it is inserted. When one sideof
your cassette tape isdone playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will notstart playing
until the radio is on. If you wantto insert a cassette tape
when the ignitionis off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,
TONE, LEVEL,
and SPEAKER controlsjust as you dofor the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
is inserted.The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY willappear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
of
the tapeis playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it could be that:
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubsof the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down andtry turning the right
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check tosee if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds.
You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press theleft arrow again to return
to playingspeed.
3-13
. ..
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears onthe display,
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons totune to another
radio station while inFF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,
it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to selectionsfor a few
seconds. The tape will goto a selection, stopfor a few
seconds, then go on tothe next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
that is playing.
6 EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
off.
activated with the radio off and/or the ignition
3-1
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itstill
will
play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold
the eject buttonfor three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
NR.
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby
Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tapefor clearer soundfor Cr02
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the
slot, label side up. The
are
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio
on and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on
the display,the disc will begin playing. Compact discs
may be loaded with the radiooff but they will not start
playing until the radio is on.
If you wantto inserta disc
when the ignition is off,first press the eject button.
TUNE-SEEE: When this button is pressed,it has
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
the same, whether
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller two positions. This button works
it is pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
button to seek tothe next or previous selectionon the
If you’re drivingon a very rough road orif it’s very
compact disc.
hot, the disc may not play.If the disc comes out, it
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
could be that:
seconds. The compact disc willgo to a selection, stop
The disc is upside down.
for a few seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
this button again tostop scanning.
0 The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
RDM: Press this button to hear
the tracks in random,
try again.)
rather than sequential, order. PressRDM again to turn
off random play.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an
error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the compact disc player to remove a compact
R W Press and hold theleft arrow to reversethe
disc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with
the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
radio off and/or the ignition off.
FF: Press and holdthe right arrow to fast forward to
another partof the compactdisc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
3-15
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc@Player (If Equipped)
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and MiniDisc. The audio source must
be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are shown
on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back
to the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.
3-16
positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for lessthan two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on tothe next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds,the station you set will return.
5 . Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
When battery poweris removed and later applied, you
will not haveto reset yourradio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN:Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to of
each
your preset stationsfor five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station storedon your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception,the radio will notstop at the
preset station.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE) is
found. The radio keeps separate tone settings
for each
band, each preset (except weather band presets), and
each source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
Adjusting the Speakers
4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE controlis found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, pressthe plus (+) or minus (-) symbol
on this button to select the desired level.
3-17
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.
The tape will
begin playing as soon as
it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may
be
loaded withthe radio off but they will notstart playing
If you wantto insert a cassette tape
until the radio is on.
when the ignition isoff, first press the eject button.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to
see if your
tape is broken. Try new
a tape.)
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly.
The
You may use
the radio will play while the tape rewinds.
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Pressthe left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow tofast forward to another part
While the tapeis playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL, of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
and SPEAKER controlsjust as you dofor the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a taperadio station while inFF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
is inserted.The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
of
two positions. This button works
the same, whetherit is
the tape is playing.
pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this button
to seek tothe next or previous selection onthe tape.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
could be that:
between
each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
The cassette tapeis tight and the cassette player
sound will mute while seeking.
cannot turn the hubs
of the tape. Hold the cassette
for a few
tape with the open end down and try turning the rightSCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
seconds.
The
tape
will
go
to
a
selection,
stop
for
a few
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the button again to stop scanning.
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
Playing a MiniDisc
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
that is playing.
Insert a disc partway into
the slot, label side up. The
player
will
pull
it
in.
If
the
ignition andthe radio areon
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button the
to
and the underlined MiniDisc symbol appears on the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
display, the disc will begin playing. MiniDiscs may be
radio will play. Eject maybe activated withthe radio off
off but they will notstart playing
loaded with the radio
and/or the ignitionoff.
until the radio is on.If you want to insert a disc when
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears onthe display,
the ignition is off, first press theeject button.
It will still
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
While a MiniDisc is playing,MD TRACK number will
play tapes,but you should cleanit as soon as possible to
appear onthe display followedby ALBUM title, then
prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean TRACK title.The display then reverts back to showing
MD TRACK number.
the player, press and hold the
eject button for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
If you’re driving on a very rough road
or if it’s very
hot,
the
disc
may
not
play.
If
the
disc
comes
out, it
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
could be that:
NR.
background noisefrom tapes encoded with Dolby
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
and try again.)
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error can’t be
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust
to
corrected, please contact your dealer.
the type of cassette tape for clearer soundfor Cr02
cassette tapes.
R W Press and holdthe left arrow to reverse the
MiniDisc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another partof the MiniDisc. Releaseit to return to
playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
it
two positions. This button works the same, whether
is pressed to the first or second position. Press this
button to seek to the next or previous selection on
the MiniDisc.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)(If Equipped)
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The MiniDisc will go to a selection, stopfor a
few seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hearthe tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. PressRDM again to turn
off random play.
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the MiniDisc player to remove a MiniDisc.
The
off
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio
andor the ignition off.
3-20
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob againto turn the systemoff. To
increase volume,turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.
AVC: Your system hasa feature called Automatic
Volume Control (AVC). WithAVC, your audio system
monitors the noise inthe vehicle. Then,AVC
automatically adjusts the volume level
so that it always
sounds the same to you.To use AVC, press and hold the
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
OFF appears onthe display. Then pressthe LEVEL
plus (+) symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON
will appear on the display. AVC VOLUME will appear
on the display any time you adjust the volume while
AVC is on. To turn AVC off, press and hold the
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
ON
appears onthe display. Then press the LEVEL minus(-)
symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROLOFF will appear
on the display.
SOURCE: Press this button to selecta source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc.
The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display.If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display.
If none of the audio sources
are loaded,NO SOURCE LOADED will appear onthe
display. Press this button againor BAND to switch back
to the radio.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button toselect AM, FMl, FM2
or weather.
TUNE-SEEK: When this buttonis pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the
first position to
manually tune to higheror lower stations.If this button
is held at thefirst position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
scan radio stations.The radio will goto a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must be off to use this mode.
You can set up to
24 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2 and six
weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds. Whenever you press that
3-21
numbered buttonfor less than two seconds, the
station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and
later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each
of
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio willgo
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. PressSCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception,the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
receive and display messagesfrom radio stations and
search for a stronger station when a station is too
weak for listening.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcastRDS information.
0RDS SELECT Press this button to use the
alternate RDS functions (RDS,
TA, MSG, PTY and
PTY > ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
RDS SELECT: will appear on
the display. The alternate
RDS functions are only available when you are using
the FM band of your radio.
RDS (1): With RDS off, press theRDS SELECT
RDS on. The
button, followed by this button to turn
RDS display will turn on.You must have RDS on to
use the newRDS functions. The RDS display will
Using RDS Mode
also turn on ifone of the other RDS function buttons
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems has been pressed on. If you are tuned to a station
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. broadcasting RDS information, the station’s call letters
When RDS ison, the radio can:
and Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s
frequency on the display. After
five seconds, the
seek only to stations with the types of programs you
the display bythe
program type will be replaced on
want to listen to,
station’s program type name.The program type and
seek to stations with traffic announcements,
program type name may be the same or different.
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
3-22
Press BAND to recall
the frequency and program type
displays. If the radio is tuned to a station thatis not
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency
will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the radio
will searchfor a stronger station in the network when a
station gets too weakfor listening. Press the RDS
SELECT button, followed by this button again to turn
RDS off. All RDS functions willbe turned off.
REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access
the region function. When anRDS station becomes
weak, this function searchesfor a stronger station within
the same network. A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down
into regions.
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic
are available to you. When the region functionon,isthe
radio only searchesfor stations in the same network and
region. You can only use the region function whenRDS
is already on. Pressthe RDS SELECT button. Then
press and holdthe RDS buttonfor two seconds.
REGION: ON will appear onthe display. While
REGION: ON appearson the display, press theRDS
button again to turn the region
function off. REGION:
OFF will appear onthe display. The region function can
be turned on again
by pressing the RDS button.
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by
this button to receive traffic announcements.
The radio
will turn on the TA display.TP will appear on the
display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the tuned station.If the current tuned station does not
to a
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek
station which does. When the radio finds a station which
broadcasts traffic announcements,it will stop. If no
FOUND will appear on the
station is found, NONE
display. WhenSEEK or SCAN is pressed withthe
traffic announcement functionon, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume called TA volume.To increase TA
volume, turn thePWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it to
the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME will appear on
the display while the volume is being adjusted.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will it,
hear
even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tapeor
compact disc is playing.If the radio tunes to a related
network station for a traffic announcement,it will return
to the original station when the announcement
is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was
being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button message is displayed, use < and > to move up and
again to turn TA off.
down the PTY list.If you pause ona PTY for three
seconds, PRESET FTY NEWS will appear on the
MSG (3): When RDS is on, if the current station has a
display. While this message is displayed, you can save
message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
the PTY ina preset by pressing one of the six numbered
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see
the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Allow three seconds
for the message to disappear if you do not want to save
display, parts of the message will appear every three
the PTY in a preset. See “Radio Data Systems(RDS)
seconds until the message is completed.
To see the parts
Program
Type (PTY) Selections” in the Index.
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new groupof words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received. Each message can only be read once.
PTY (4): This button is used toturn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press theRDS SELECT
button, followed by this button.The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press theRDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn the PTY displayoff.
< PTY > ( 5 ) (6):With RDS on, press theRDS SELECT
button, followed by < or > . The PTY display will turn
on, if it is not already on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS
will appear on the display for three seconds. (The
PTY shown will be the last PTY selected.) While this
3-24
When the PTY display is on, pressSEEK and SCAN to
find radio stationsof the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used
for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
If both PTY and
FOUND will appear on the display.
TA are on, the radio will searchfor stations with traffic
announcements and the selectedPTY.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections’’
in the Index.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six F M 1 and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to selectFM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station withthe PTY you desire.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds, thePTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery poweris removed andlater applied, you
will not haveto reset your RDS presets because
the
radio remembers them.
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
even if RDS mode is turnedoff. ALERT appears on the
display when analert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements.To
increase volume, turn the
PWRNOL knob tothe right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME
will appear on the display while
the volume is being
on the
adjusted. When an alert announcement comes
tuned radio stationor a related network station, you will
hear it, even if the volume is muted orcassette
a
tape or
compact disc is playing.If the radio tunesto a related
network station for an alert announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stopfor the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
by one of these buttons to displaythe time for the
current station.STATION TIME IS will be displayed.
NO STATION
If a time has not been sent to the radio,
TIME will be displayed.If you have recently tunedto
the station, you may need to wait a minute before the Setting theTone
time is available tothe radio. To set the clock to the
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
HR or
current displayed station time, press and hold
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE)is
MN until TIME UPDATEDis displayed. Thereis a
found. The radio keeps separate tone settings
for each
two second delay beforethe time is updated. RDS
band, each preset (except weather band presets) and
mode does not have tobe on to use thisfunction, but
each source.
you must be tuned to an FM RDS
station.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
ALERT This typeof announcement warnsof national
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
or local emergencies.You will not be able to turnoff
the desired level.
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come
on
3-25
Adjusting the Speakers
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature used
is
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
to provide a choice of four different listening experiences: BALANCE or FADE control
is found.
TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and SPACIOUS.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE
or
DSP can be used while listening to the radio, the cassette
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to turn DSP
tape player or the CD player. Press
this button to select the desired level.
on. Press and releasethis button until you reach the
desired selection. Totum DSP off, press and holdthis
Playing a CassetteTape
button until DSPOFF appears on the display. When DSP
OFF is displayed, the system will provide the best overall With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon
as it is inserted. When one sideof
Bose@performaxe. The radio keeps separate DSP
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
settings for each band (except weather band, which is
other sideof your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
always set to TALK) and each source.
loaded with the radiooff but they will not start playing
e TALK: This settingis used when listening to
until the radio ison. If you want to insert a cassette tape
non-musical material such as news, talkshows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes when the ignitionis off, first pressthe eject button.
spoken words sound very clear.
While the tapeis playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL
and DSP controlsjust as you dofor the radio. Other
e FRONT SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
is
controls may have different functions when a tape
give the front seat occupants
the best possible sound
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
qualities. FRONTSEAT can be used at any time
for
any material. Rear seat passengers
in the vehicle may symbol. TAPE PLAY willappear on the display when a
of
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
not getthe same effect.
the tapeis playing.
e AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
0 SPACIOUS: This settingis used to make the
listening space seem larger.
3-26
TUNE-SEEK: When this buttonis pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this button
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
to seek to the nextor previous selection on the tape.
cannot turnthe hubs of the tape. Holdthe cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right Your tape must haveat least three secondsof silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flipthe tape over and
sound will mute while seeking.
repeat. If the hubsdo not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be usedthe
in
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
player. Try a new tapeto be sure your player is
seconds. The tape willgo to a selection, stopfor a few
working properly.
seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
The cassette tape is broken. (Checkto see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The that is playing.
radio will play while
the tape rewinds. You may use
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
the radiooff and/or the ignitionoff.
to playing speed.
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears on the display,
FF: Press the right arrow to
fast forward to another part
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
It will still
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
You may use your station pushbuttons totune to another
prevent damage tothe tapes and player. See “Careof
radio station while inFF mode. Pressthe right arrow
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
again to return to playingspeed.
the player, press and hold
the eject buttonfor three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it
could be that:
3-27
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for Cr02
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
If you’re driving on a very rough or
road
if it’s very hot, the
disc may not play.If the disc comes out,it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet,
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fastforward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
this button to
pressed to the frrst or second position. Press
seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The compact disc will go to a selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the compact disc player to remove a compact
disc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with the
radio off and/or the ignition off.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
MiniDisc Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press thisknob lightly to turn the system
off. To
on. Press the knob again to turn the system
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to
the left to decrease volume.
AVC: Your system has a feature called Automatic
Volume Control (AVC). With AVC, your audio system
monitors the noise in the vehicle. Then, AVC
automatically adjusts the volume levelso that it always
sounds the same to you. To use AVC, press and hold the
OFF
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
appears on the display. Then press the LEVEL plus
(+)
symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROLON will appear
on the display.AVC VOLUME will appear on the display
any time you adjust the volume while AVC is on. To turn
AVC off, press and hold the TONE button until AUTO
VOLUME CONTROLON appears on the display. Then
press the LEVEL minus(-) symbol. AUTO VOLUME
CONTROL OFF will appear on the display.
SOURCE: Press this button to select
a source. Sources
include cassette and MiniDisc.The audio source must
are shown
be loaded to play. Available loaded sources
on the display. If a sourceis being used, it will be
underlined on the display.If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
3-29
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
BAND: Press this button to selectA M , FM1, FM2
or weather.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has
two positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position
for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button
is released. Press
this button tothe second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
go to a station, stop
scan radio stations. The radio will
for five seconds, thengo on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must beoff to use this mode.You can set up
to 24 stations (six A M , six FM1, six FM2 and
six weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select A M , FM1, FM2 or weather.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttonsfor
3-30
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio will go
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop
at
the preset station.
RDS (1): With RIDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systemsfollowed by this button to turn RDSon. The RDS
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. display will turnon. You must have RDS on to use the
new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on
When RDS ison, the radio can:
if one of the otherRDS function buttons has been
seek only to stations with the types
of programs you
pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting
waq$ to listen to,
RDS information, the station's call letters and Program
Type (PTY) will replace the station's frequency on the
0 seek to stations with traffic announcements,
display. After five seconds, the program type will be
0 receive announcements concerning local and
replaced on the display by
the station's program type
national emergencies,
name. The program type and program type name may
be the same or different. Press BAND to recall the
0 receive and display messages from radio stations
and
frequency and program type displays.
If the radiois
0 search for a stronger station when a station
is too
tuned to a station that is not broadcasting
RDS
weak for listening.
information, the station's frequency will remain on the
display. WhileRDS is on, the radio will searchfor a
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
stronger station in the network when a station gets too
which broadcast RDS information.
weak for listening. Press theRDS SELECT button,
0RDS SELECT Press this button to use the
followed by this button again to turn RDS off. RDS
All
alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and
functions willbe turned off.
C PTY > ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
REGION: You can also use theRDS button to access
RDS SELECT will appear onthe display. The alternate
the region function. When an
RDS station becomes
RDS functions are only available when you
are using
weak, this function searchesfor a stronger station within
the FM band of your radio.
the same network.A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down into regions.
3-31
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic TA volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it
to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME will appear
are available to you. When the region function
on,isthe
radio only searches for stations in the same network andon the display while the volume is being adjusted.
region. You can only usethe region function whenRDS
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
press and holdthe RDS button for two seconds.
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or
REGION: ON will appearon the display. While
compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
RDS
REGION: ON appears on the display, press the
network station for a traffic announcement,it will
button again to turn the region function
off. REGION:
return to the original station when
the announcement
OFF will appear onthe display. The region function can
is finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player
RDS button.
be turned on again by pressing the
was being used,the tape or compact disc will stay in the
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followedby
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
this button to receive traffic announcements. The
Press the RDS SELECT button, followedby this button
radio will turn on theTA display. TP will appear on
again to turnTA off.
the displayif the tuned station broadcasts traffic
MSG (3): When RDS is on,if the current station has a
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button see
to the
the tuned station.If the current tuned station does not
message.
If
the
whole
message
does
not
appear
on the
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station which does. When the radio finds a station which display, partsof the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed.
To see the parts
broadcasts traffic announcements,it will stop. If no
of the message faster than everythree seconds, press this
station is found, NONEFOUND will appear on the
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. When SEEKor SCAN is pressed with the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
traffic announcement functionon, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements. MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received. Each message can only be read once.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume calledTA volume. To increase
3-32
PTY (4): This button is used toturn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press theRDS SELECT
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear onthe display. If both PTY and
button, followed by this button. The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press theRDS SELECT button,
off.
followed by this button again to turn the PTY display
TA are on, the radio will searchfor stations with traffic
announcements and the selectedPTY.
< PTY > ( 5 ) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS SELECT
button, followed by < or > . The PTY display will turn
on, if it is not alreadyon. RDS SELECT: PTYNEWS
will appear on the display for three seconds. (The PTY
shown will be the lastPTY selected.) While this message
is displayed, use < and > to move up and down the
PTY list. If you pause on a PTY for three seconds,
PRESET PTY NEWS will appear on the display. While
this message is displayed, you can save the
PTY in a
preset by pressing one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Allow three seconds for the
message to disappear if youdo not want to save the PTY
in a preset. See “Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program
Type (FTY) Selections” in the Index.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
(PTYs).
you return to your favorite Program Types
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”
in the Index.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMl and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station with the PTY you desire.
4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
When the PTY display ison, press SEEK and SCAN to
RDS presets because the
will not have to reset your
find radio stationsof the PTY you want to listen to. The radio remembers them.
last PTY selected will be used
for seek and scan modes.
3-33
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
for the
by one of these buttons to display the time
current station.STATION TIMEIS will be displayed.
NO STATION
If a time hasnot been sent to the radio,
TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to
the station,you may need to wait a minute before the
time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the
current displayed station time, press and hold
HR or
MN until TIMEUPDATED is displayed. Thereis a
two second delay before the time is updated.
RDS mode
does not have to be on use
to this function, but you must
be tuned to anFM RDS station.
ALERT This type of announcement warnsof national
turn off
or local emergencies.You will not be able to
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements. To
increase volume, turn the
PWRNOL knob tothe right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME
will appear on the display while the volume is being
adjusted. When an alert announcement comes on the
tuned radio stationor a related network station, you will
hear it, even if the volumeis muted or a cassette tape or
MiniDisc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for an alert announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or MiniDisc player
is
playing, play will stopfor the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone
control (BASS, TREBLE orMIDRANGE) is found. The
radio keeps separate tone settings for each band, each
each source.
preset (except weather band presets) and
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this buttonto select
the desired level.
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) featureis
used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences: TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and
SPACIOUS. DSP can be used while listening to the
radio, the cassette tape player or the MiniDisc player.
Press this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this
button until you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP
off, press and hold this button until
DSP OFF appears on
the display. When DSPOFF is displayed, the system
will provide the best overall Bose performance.
The radio keeps separate DSP settings
for each band
(except weather band, whichis always set to TALK) and
each source.
TALK: This setting is used when listening to
non-musical material suchas news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape.
TALK makes
spoken words sound very clear.
FRONT SEAT This setting adjusts the audioto
give the front seat occupants the best possible sound
qualities. FRONTSEAT can be used at any time
for
any material. Rearseat passengers inthe vehicle may
not get the same effect.
AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
Adjusting the Speakers
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol
on this button to select
the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.The tape will
begin playing as soon asit is inserted. Whenone side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays
the
other sideof your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radiooff but they will not start playing
until the radiois on. If you want to inserta cassette tape
when the ignitionis off, first press the eject button.
TONE, LEVEL
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,
and DSP controlsjust as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functions when a tape is
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAYwill appear on the display when a
tape is playing, withan arrow to indicate whichside of
the tape is playing.
3-35
1
1
~
1
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
couldbethat:
0
The cassette tapeis tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs
of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and
try turning the right
hub tothe left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player
is
working properly.
0
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see
if your
tape is broken.Try a new tape.)
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,
it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether
it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next
or previous selection onthe tape.
Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
seconds. The tape willgo to a selection, stop
for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
RW Press theleft arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The that is playing.
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to
your station pushbuttons to tune
to another radio station
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
while in RW mode. Pressthe left arrow again to return
activated with the radiooff and/or the ignitionoff.
to playing speed.
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears on the display,
FF:Press the right arrow to
fast forward to another part
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune
to another
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
radio station whilein FF mode. Press the right arrow
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
again to return to playing speed.
the player, press and hold the eject button
for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
3-36
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
and try again.)
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license If any error occurs repeatedly or an
if error can’t be
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby corrected, please contact your dealer.
and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby
R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
MiniDisc. Release it to return to playing speed.
Auto Cr02 allows thecassette tape player to adjust to
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
the typeof cassette tapefor clearer soundfor Cr02
another partof the MiniDisc. Release to
it return to
cassette tapes.
playing speed.
Playing a MiniDisc
Insert a disc partwayinto the slot, label side up. The
player will pullit in. If the ignition and the radio areon
and the underlined MiniDisc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. MiniDiscs may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radiois on. If you want to insert a disc when
the ignition is off, first press theeject button.
While a MiniDisc is playing,
MD TRACK number will
appear on the display followed by ALBUM title, then
TRACK title.The display then reverts back to showing
MD TRACK number.
If you’re driving on a very rough roadif orit’s very
hot, the disc may not play. If thedisc comes out, it
could be that:
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to
seek to the next or previous selection on the MiniDisc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
seconds. The MiniDisc will go to a selection, stop for a
few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
4h EJECT Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the MiniDisc playerto remove a MiniDisc.The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
3-37
ription
Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program
Type
Description
(PTY) Selections
PTY List
Adlt Hit ...........................
Adult Hits
Any ....................................
Any
Classic1 .............................
Classical
Classical Rock
Cls Rock .......................
College
College ..............................
Country
Country .............................
Info ..............................
Information
Jazz
Jazz.. ..................................
Language ........................... Language
News .................................
News
Nostalga ............................
Nostalgia
Oldies ................................
Oldies
Persnlty ..........................
Personality
Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Public
Rhythm and Blues
R & B .......................
Re1 Musc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ReligiousMusic
Re1 Talk ........................
Religious Talk
3-38
PTY List
Rock M ...........................
Rock Music
Soft ....................................
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rock ..........................
sports ................................
sports
Talk ...................................
Talk
Top40 ...............................
Top40
Weather .............................
Weather
Factory PTY Presets
b e t
I
FMl
I
Preset 1
FM2
Jazz Adult Hits
Preset 2
Classical
Oldies
Preset 3
News
Religious Music
Preset 4
5
Preset 6
Soft Rock Public
Rock Preset
Country
R&B
Top 40
Console-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
Once you have loaded the discs in
the magazine, slide
open the doorof the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine intothe changer in the direction
of the
arrow markedon top of the magazine.
Close the doorby sliding it all the way forward.
When the CD magazine is loaded, the changer will
begin checkingfor discs in the magazine. This will
continue for up to one minute, depending on the
number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player,slide the
CD changer door all the way open, then press the
eject button. Remember tokeep the door closed
whenever possible to keepdirt and dust from
getting inside the changer.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in
on
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to six the changer, theCD changer symbol will appear
the radio display.If the CD changeris checking the
discs continuously.Normal size discs may be played
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flashon the
using the slots supplied in the magazine.
display until the changer is ready to play. When
a
You must first load the magazine with discs before you CD begins playing,a disc and track number will be
can play a compact disc. Load the CDs
from bottom to
displayed. The disc numbers are listed onthe front of
top, placinga disc in the magazine label
side up. If you
the magazine.
load a disc label side down,the disc will not play and an
All of the CD functions are controlled
by the radio
error will occur. Repeat this procedure
for loading up to
buttons, exceptfor ejecting theCD magazine.
six discsin the magazine.
3-39
PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons one through six to
select compact discs one through six. These pushbuttons
represent the order of the discs loaded in the changer.
REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection.
FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to
seek to the next or previous selection onthe compact disc.
TRACK SCAN: When you press SCAN for less than
two seconds, you will hear the first few seconds of each
track on a disc. Press SCAN again to stop TRACK
SCAN. The CD will mute while scanning and SCAN
will appear on the display.
DISC SCAN: When you press SCAN for more than two
seconds, you will hear the first few seconds of the first
track on each disc. Press SCAN again to stop DISC
SCAN. The CDwill mute while scanning and SCAN
will appear on the display.
3-40
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on the
display to randomly seek through discs. Press RDM
again to turn off random play.
SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in the
changer. Each time you press this button, DISC
LOADING will appear on the display and the disc
number on the radio display will go tothat of the
next available CD.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. The
audio source must be loaded to play. If none of the
audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will
appear on the display. Press this button again or BAND
to switch back to the radio.
A EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way
open. Press the upward triangle button. The CD
magazine will eject.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
4. Insert the adapter.
CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed
for
the following:
This override routine will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
The road is too rough.The disc should play when
the road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannotbe
corrected, please contact your dealer.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter
kit with your cassette
tape player after activating
the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold theSOURCE button for two seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash three
times, indicating thefeature is active.
Radio Personalization(If Equipped)
If DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or
DRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the
display when the radio isfirst turned on, your vehicle is
equipped with thisfeature.
With thisfeature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settings.
The settings
recalled by the radio are determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number onthe back of the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver1 or to driver2. The radio settings
by
will automatically adjust to where they were last set
the identified driver. The settings can also be recalled
by
1 or 2
briefly pressing the MEMORY seat buttons
located on the driver’s door.
Your radio can store home and away presets. Home
and away presets allow you to use one of
setpreset
radio settings in the area where you live, and another
set when you goout of town. Thatway, you will not
need to reprogram your presets every time you travel.
3-41
With the radiooff and the clock displayed, use
FF and
To select the away
RW to select home or away presets.
presets, press and hold
FF for five counts until you hear
a beep.The next time the radio comes
on, the away
presets willbe active. To select the home presets, press
and hold RW for five counts until you hear a beep.
The next time the radio comes on, the home presets
will be active.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset
your home radio presets because
the radio remembers them. However,
you will have to
reset your away radio presets.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@ is designed to discourage theft
of your
radio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrent
feature on each radio that
is automatic -- there is no
programming required.The radio in your vehicle
cannot be used in any other vehicle. When the radio
was originally installed in your vehicle at the factory,
it
stored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each
time the ignitionis turned on, the VIN is verified.
If the
vehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in the
radio, THEFTLOCK will be activated and the audio
system will not play.If the radiois removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN
in the radio can be used to
trace the radio back to your vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controlscan
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
VOL: Press the up arrow
button to increase volume
and the down arrow button
to decrease volume.
SEL: When listening to the radio, press the
up or down
arrow button to tune to the next or previous preset radio
station. When listening to a cassette tape, the up or down
arrow button can be used SEEK
to
forward and rearward
through the tape. Pressing the up
or down arrow button
when listening toa CD will cause the player go
to to the
next or previous selection. When
in Radio Data Systems
(RDS) Program Type(PTY) mode, the up or down
arrow button can be used to performPTY
a preset seek.
PSEEK will appear on the display while the FTY preset
seek is performed. The radio will seek of
allthe PTYs
stored in presets, except for the PTY Any.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than
for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise
if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give youthe best sound, butFM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles ( 16 to 65 km). Tall
FM signals, causing
buildings or hills can interfere with
the sound to come and go.
Tips AboutYour Audio System
Hearing damagefrom loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control on your
radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before youadd any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
also interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that hasbeen added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobileradio andtelephone units.
0-
-0
3-43
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularlycan cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes
or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure
of the tape player.
Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
TAPE to indicate that you have used your tape player
If
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
this message appearson the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned.It will still play tapes, but
you should cleanit as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player.
If you notice a
reduction in sound quality,
try a known good cassette
to seeif it is the tape or the tape player at fault.
If this
other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning methodfor your cassette
tape player is the use
of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape headas the hubsof the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-44
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unitis equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a brokenTo
tape.
prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold theSOURCE button for two
seconds. The tape symbol onthe display will
flash three times.
4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action
cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette afterthe manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type
of cleaning cassette will not
eject onits own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The useof a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you cleanthe player, press and hold
the eject
button for three seconds to resetthe CLEAN TAPE
indicator. The radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG
CLEARED to showthe indicator was reset.
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM-FM antennas are located in
the front
windshield and rear window. Be sure that
the inside
surfaces of the front windshield and rear window are
not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they
could interfere with radio reception.
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
NOTICE:
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight
and dust.If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wipingfrom the center to theedge.
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that
is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the
edge of the hole andthe outer edge.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger,you
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
hear staticon your radio station, it could mean
that a
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised,
due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal tothe CD mechanism.
defogger grid line has been damaged.
If this is true, the
grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to
your vehicle, and the antenna needs
to be attached tothe
glass, be sure that youdo not damage the grid linesfor
the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular telephone
antenna overthe grid lines.
3-45
@% NOTES
3-46
fp'
-%
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you'll find information about driving on different kinds
of roads and in varying weather conditions. We've also
included many other usefultips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4- 10
4- 12
4-13
4- 14
4- 15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 17
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-29
4-3 1
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect theunexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Beready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about themost preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehiclein front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please startwith a very important safety device in your
Cadillac: Buckle up. (See“Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive drivingrequires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving
techniques could save
your life.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s
the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands
of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
if the
what if people do? How much is “too much”
driver plansto drive? It’s a lotless than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affectsfour things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)
of someone
who is drinking depends uponfour things:
Drunken Driving
0
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
MuscularCoordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half
of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the resultof someone who was drinking
and driving. In recentyears, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
so they
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,
never drive after drinking.For persons under21, it’s
U.S. state to drink alcohol.
against the law in every
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasonsfor these laws.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
(120 ml) glasses
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce
of wine orthree mixed drinks if each had- 1/2
1 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcohol is carriedin body water, this means thata
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than
a
man of her same body weight wheneach has the same
number of drinks.
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing numberof U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the United States 0.04
is percent.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (inone hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
drinks, and
depends on how much alcohol is in the
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to driveis affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired atBAC
a approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example, if
0.05 percent.
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces
Statistics
show
that
the
chance
of
being
in
a collision
or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.12 percent. A person who
BAC would be close to
of
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a
somewhat lower BAC level.
collision. At a BAC level
of 0.10 percent, the chance of
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collisionis 12 times greater; at a
a lower relative percentage
of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is25 times greater!
4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself
of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold
showers will speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as whenchild
a darts into the street?
A person with evena moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s somethingelse about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cordor
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving very
is dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand
judgment canbe affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if‘ you drive after drinking.
Please don’tdrink and driveor ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab;or if
you’re witha group, designatea driver who will
not drink.
--
--
~~
~~~~~~~~~
~~
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play apart. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts-- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake.Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much
faster if you doa lot of heavy braking.If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake
life.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you willstill have some power brake assist. But
you will useit when you brake. Once the power assist
is used up, it may take longer tostop and the brake
pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
front of you.
4-7
You slam on thebrakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn't change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster front of you, you won't have time to apply yourbrakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
enough room up ahead to stor>,even though youhave
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don't pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Traction Control System
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that
one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
The TRACTION ENGAGED message will display
on
the Driver Information Center when
the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See “Driver Information
Center Messages” inthe Index. You may feelor hear the
system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control
will
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you
to safely use it again, youm y reengage the cruise control.
(See “Cruise Control” inthe Index.)
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
if you ever need to.(You
traction control system off
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud,ice or snow. See “RockingYour
Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system off,
press the traction control
disable button located on
the center console.
TRACTION
CONTROL
United States
Canada
This warning light willcome on to let you know if
there’s a problem with your traction control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on,
the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TRACTIONOW message will displayon the
Driver Information Center.If the system is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION
OFF message will display-- but the system won’t turn
off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a
current needto limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing Steering Tips
the button again. The TRACTION READY message
should display briefly on the Driver Information Center. Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake
at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system
is not functioning,you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
A lotof the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driveror beginner, eachof us is subject to
the same lawsof physics when drivingon curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet
ice, you’ll understand this.
on the
The traction you can get in a curve depends
condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle
MAGNASTEEP
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
Your vehicle may be equipped with
GM
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
MAGNASTEER, a system that continuously adjusts the can control.
effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds.
It
provides ease when parking yet a firm, solid feel at
highway speeds.
4-10
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration-- have to do
their work where the tires meet road.
the Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand
too much of those
places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
To help you steer in the direction you want to go, during
certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gear
selection is controlled. This will maximize the available
drive wheel torque and minimize the transaxle response
time and shift activity. During this kind
of maneuver, the
transaxle shifts automatically as vehicle speed changes.
Steering in Emergencies
What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease up on the
There are times when steering
can be more effective
accelerator pedal,steer the vehiclethe way you wantit
than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and
to go, and slow down.
find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls
Since your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak, you will out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between
see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED messageon the
parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can
Driver Information Center.See “Stability Sys Engaged
avoid these problems by braking-- if you can stop in
Message” in theIndex.
time. But sometimes you can’t; thereisn’t room.
That’s the timefor evasive action-- steering around
Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should
the problem.
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speedsare
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
go slower.
favorable conditions you’ll want to
like these. First apply your brakes.
(See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.)
It is betterto
If you need to reduce your speed
as you approach a
remove as much speed as you can
from a possible
curve, doit before you enter the curve, while your
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
front wheels are straight ahead.
or right depending on the space available.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintaina reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate untilyou are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently intothe straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find thatyour right wheels have droppedoff the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a goodreason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle aboutt6 pa$$ ‘hother on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since
the
passing vehicle occupiesthe same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrenderto frustration or anger can
suddenly putthe passing driverface to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision.
So here are some tipsfor passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect
your passing patterns.If you have anydoubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
Watch for traflic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can seea sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken
all right to pass
center line usually indicates it’s
cross a solid
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never
line on your side of the lane
or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close tothe vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, followingtoo closely reduces your area
of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass
is coming up,
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t
so you will be
get too close. Time your move
increasing speedas the time comesto move into the
other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes for
up the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
to
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying
pass you asyou pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-13
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lanechange signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to befarther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
4-14
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route
or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.
If your traction control system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your
foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straightenout. Always be readyfor a
second skidif it occurs.
If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.
Of course, tractionis reduced when water, snow,ice,
on the road. For safety, you’ll
gravel or other material is
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down
on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving ona surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid suddensteering, acceleration or
braking (includingengine braking by shifting toa lower
gear). Any sudden changes could causethe tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicleis skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” and slow down
when you have any doubt.
--
Night drivingis more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, orby fatigue.
Here are some tipson night driving.
0
Drivedefensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When
you are facedwith severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,
or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night
is made much
of the glass
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside
can buildup a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up
far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But aseyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Justas your headlamps should be
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
checked regularlyfor proper aim, so should your eyes
driver may require at least twice as much lightseetothe
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light-- and aren’t
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night even awareof it.
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
Night Vision
4-16
Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving.The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades arein good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harderto see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings,the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips
of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads.
4-17
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or even
can cause problems, too.
going through some car washes
The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.
I
A CAUTION:
-
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with
the road.
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure inone or
more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple”
the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and
fast rule about hydroplaning.The
best adviceis to slow down whenit is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” inthe Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
plan your trip into an
going. Get a city map and
unknown part of the cityjust as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities.You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green lightas a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corneris busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and
just before you
start to move, check both ways
for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch
out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
E
At the entrance, thereis usually a r a p that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view
of the freeway as you
drive alongthe entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch
on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly withthe traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leavethe lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there
isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are
the safest
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
proper lane wellin advance. If you miss your exit, do
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
up with traffic and keep to
the right. Drive at the same
on to the next exit.
speed mostof the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp canbe curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left laneon a freeway as a passing
lane.
The exit speed is usually posted.
a Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your senseof motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend
to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip.Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the
recommended pressure?
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
0
Weather Forecasts:What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh-- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles thatfirst part
you
of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip?If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs
service, haveit done before starting out.
Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Cadillac dealerships all across North America. They’ll
be ready and willing to help if you need
it,
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at
the wheel? Callit
of
awareness,
or whatever.
highway hypnosis, lack
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the droneof the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road less
in
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Hill and Mountain Roads
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull offthe road into a rest, service
or parking area andtake a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness onthe highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains
is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularlyin steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These partscan work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will
have to do all the work of slowing down. They
could getso hot that they wouldn’t workwell.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could
crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle ingear
when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to knowis this: let your engine do someof
the slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when
you
hill.
go down a steep or long
IA
AUTION:
0
I
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash.Shift down to let
your engine assistyour brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
0
0
0
4-24
Know how togo uphill. You may wantto shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help you climb
the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
or cut
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of
a hill,be alert. There couldbe
something in your lane,like a stalled car oran accident.
of
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tipsfor winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
if will
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, you
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a couple
of burlap bags
to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving onSnow or Ice
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow orice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the ice can be even more trouble because
it may offer the
road probably have good traction.
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32OF;0 O C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
However, if there is snow orice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
have a lotless traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow-- drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control
system, you’ll wantto slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions.See “Traction Control
System” in the Index.
,...,...
D
c
4-26
....
. ...,,- .
A
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Even
though you havethe anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock”in the Index.
If You’re Caught ina Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered withice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas wherethe sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could inbea
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know
for sure that you are near help
are some
and you can hike through the snow. Here
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-27
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keepwarm, but be careful.
4-28
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you
and kill
you. You can’t seeit orsmell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a windowjust a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine onlyas long as you must.This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make
it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on
with your headlamps.Let the heater run for a while.
Loading Your Vehicle
FRT.
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
CTR. RR.
TOTAL LBS.
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
COLD TIRE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
PRESSURE
SPEED
SIZE TIRE
all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again
PSI/KPa
RTG
and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable
FRT.
RR.
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
SPA.
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
every half hour or so until help comes.
1
9 8
SEVILLE
a
h
C A D I L L A C .
C R E A T I N G
A
HIGHER
STANDARD,,
(1a--Illzj
r t provides in an ernerg
Free lockout assistancf
Free dead-battery assistan
e out-of-fuel assistanc
flat-+ire change
Tranq
b
3%'
TO TOPICS QUICKLY. FOR l#FORMAT/ON~
Wearing a satetybelt correctly is one of the moa
and your passengers can do. This section CC,,.
infor1 tion about sa
usage, air bags &...
~
~..
,.
Pam 2-14
The 1998 Cadillac Seville Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safetybelts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
ComfortControlsandAudioSystems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how todrive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to doif you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6- 1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly andlooking good.
7-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Cadillac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 7- 12.
8-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Emblem and the
name SEVILLE are registered trademarks
of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it
in the
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Car Division wheneverit appears in this manual.
so it will be
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
there if you ever needit when you’reon the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual insoit the new
owner can useit.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian Owners Who Prefera
French Language Manual:
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franqais chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
in
Litho
ReservedRights
25665434
Part All
No.
ii
Edition B First
How to Use thi- Mar::,al
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to end when theyfirst receive their new vehicle.If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to lookfor what you need is the Indexin
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical listof what’s in
the manual, and the page number where you’ll findit.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a numberof safety cautionsin this book.
We use abox and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore
the warning.
These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash throughit in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, andit could be costly.
But the notice will tell
you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read othermanuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warningsin Merent colors orin
different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They
use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
These symbols
have todo with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
TURN
SIGNALS
COOLANT
TEMP
ee
FUSE
P
LIGHTER
I
(0) b e
HORN
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
BRAKE
BURNS
COOLANT
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAlTERY
--
BAllERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
CAUSTIC
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
#0
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
a
SPEAKER
e,
(a)
FUEL
12
B
L
V
,
;
A
-
-a+
Section 1 Seats and Restraint System
Here you’ll find information about
the seats in your Cadillac and how use
to your safety belts properly.You can also
learn about some things you should
not do with air bags and safety belts.
-2
.-7
.-11
.
1-12
1-12
1-18
1-19
1-19
Seats andSeat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re For Everyone
Here are Questions Many People
Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) System
1-27
1-31
1-34
1-45
1-48
1-48
1-48
Rear Seat Passengers
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
This section tells you about the power seats -- how to
adjust them, and also about reclining front seatbacks,
lumbar adjustments, heated seats and head restraints.
The lumbar controlis
located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Use the
power seat control
first to get the proper
position. Then
proceed with the
lumbar adjustment.
Power Seats
The power seat
controls are locatedon
the outboard sideof
the front seat cushion.
I
To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar control
to decrease
forward to increase support and rearward
support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower
the support mechanism.
Move the front of the control up or down to adjust Keep
in mind, that as your seating position changes, as
thefrontportion of thecushionupordown.mayduringlongtrips,
so shouldtheposition of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.
Move the rearof the control to adjust the rear portion
of the cushion up or down.
Lift up or push down onthe whole control at the
same time to move the
entire seat up or down.
To move the whole seat forward or backward, slide
the control in the direction
of the center arrow.
it
Adaptive Seat Control(If Equipped)
The adaptive control is
located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Use the
power seat controlfirst
to get the proper
position. (The lumbar
will automatically
adjust to your body’s
positioning for the
duration of the tripin
four-minute cycles.)
With the ignition on, press the control up to activate the
adaptive seat.
To reshape the lower seatback, pressthe lumbar
control forward to increase support and rearward to
decrease support.
To turn offthe adaptive seat, pressthe control down.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Column (If Equipped)
The controls for this option
are locatedon the driver’s
door panel, andare used
to program and recall
previous settings.
2
MEMOffY
SET
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the lumbar and head
restraint adjustments), both the outside mirrors and
steering wheel column toa comfortable position and
then press the MEMORY SET button. Within
five
seconds, press button “1.”
A second &or, seating and column position may be
programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing
button 2. Each time a memory button is pressed,a single
beep will sound through the radio. Each time button1 or 2
is pressed, the memory positions will be recalled. At the
factory, the exit position is preset with the steering wheel
full up and the seatfull back. However, two personalized
exit positions canbe set by first recalling the driving
position (Driver“1” or “2”), positioning the wheel and
seat in the desired exit positions and then pressing the
MEMORY SET and, within five seconds, pressing the
EXIT button. The exit position for
either previously set
driver canbe recalled by pressing theEXIT button.
Heated Seat (Option)
This option isonly available if your vehicle is equipped
with the power lumbar control feature.
The front seat controls are
located in the center
console. The rear seat
controls, for the outboard
positions only, are located
on the rear door (note that
only the outboard positions
in the rear seats are heated).
Push the button oncefor a high setting, twice for a low
setting, and a third time to turn
off the heated seat.The
LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat
approximates body temperature.The HI setting heats the
seat to a slightly higher temperature.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is
turned on. The heating elementsin the seats
automatically turn off when the vehicle’s ignition is
turned off.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
The power controls
are located on the
outboard sideof each
front seat. Press the
top of the control
forward or rearward
to adjust the seatback
angle. Push up or
down to adjust the
headrest and
shoulder belt.
But don’t have a seatback reclined
if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t their
do job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t
do its job.In a crash you
could gointo it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its
job either. In a crash the
belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection
when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Use this switch to movea
front head restraintup
or down.
Lift up on the switch to move the head restraint up.
Press down on the switch to movethe head restraint
down. The top of the head restraint shouldbe closest to
the topof your ears. This position helps reduce the
chance of a neck injury ina crash. Whenyou move a
front seat head restraint up
or down, the shoulder belt
height changes.The head restraints tilt forward and
rearward also.
Rear seat head restraintstilt forward and rearward.
1-6
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do
with safety belts.
It is extremely dangerousto ride ina cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these
areas are more
likely to be
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), orair bag system.
or she can’t wear
Don’t let anyone ride where he
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt, your injuries
can be muchworse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejectedfrom it. You can be seriously
injured orkilled. In the same crash,
you might
not beif you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly
too.
seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure
everyone in yourvehicle is in a seat andusing a
safety beltproperly.
L
Your vehicle has a light that
comes on as a reminderto
buckle up. (See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in
, the Index.)
~~
1-7
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If do
you
have a
crash, youdon’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashesare mild, and some crashes can
be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many
of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt
or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
I
Put someone on it.
Get it upto speed. Then stopthe vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.
1-9
.
..
The person keeps going until stopped
by something.
In a real vehicle,it could be the windshield ...
1-10
or the instrument panel...
Here Are QuestionsMany People Ask
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
&.. Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You couEd be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of
being conscious during and after
an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, much
is
greater if
you are belted.
&.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time tostop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the
forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them inthe future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offeredfor sale has required the use
of
safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up get
to the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
@
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault
-- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect youfrom things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number
of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds
of less than40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This partis only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part
of this manual
called “Children.” Follow those rulesfor
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s
how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
1-12
3. Pick upthe latch plate and~ u lthe
l belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull upon the latch plate to make sure
it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” in the Index.
Make sure the release button on the buckle
is
positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe
safety belt quickly if you ever hadto.
worn low and snug on
The lap part of the belt should be
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d
be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash.
1-13
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
When you move a front seat headrestraint, the shoulder
belt height changes.See “Head Restraints’’ in the Index.
@
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder beltis too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-14
u u
You can be seriously hurt your
if shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
What's wrong with this?
' A CAUTION:
You can beseriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like
this. In a crash,
the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The
belt forceswould be there, notat thepelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
I
@
What’s wrong with this?
I
You can beseriously injured if you wear the
In a crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm.
body would movetoo far forward, which would
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strongas shoulder bones.
You could alsoseverely injure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
A:
The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulderat all times.
1-16
What’s wrong with this?
1
You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.
If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly, or ask
to
dealer
your
fix it.
I
A:
The belt is twistedacross the body.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely tobe
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out
of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt
is out of the
way. If you slam the door on
it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-18
The best way to protectthe fetus is to protectthe
mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in acrash. For
pregnant women, asfor anyone, the key to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wearthe right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see “Driver Position” in the Index.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works
the same
way as the driver’s safety belt-- except for one thing. If
you ever pull thelap portion of the belt out allthe way,
you will engagethe child restraint locking feature.If
this happens,just let the belt go back all
the way and
start again.
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) systems or air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a “Next Generation”
frontal air bagfor the driver, another “Next Generation”
frontal air bagfor the right front passenger, a side
impact air bagfor the driver, and another side impact air
bag for the right front passenger. Next Generation
frontal air bags are designed help
to reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. But
even theseair bags must inflate very quickly if they
are
to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
1-19
Here are the most important things
to know about the air
bag systems:
A CAUTION:
-
-
-
You can beseverely injured orkilled in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things
inside thevehicle or being ejected fromit. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags even Next Generation air
bags are designed to work with safety belts
but
don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
--
--
*.w$l;
FA fZ,i,”$.
a!
Next Generation frontal air bags
for the driver
and right front passenger are
designed to work
only in moderate tosevere crashes where the
front of your vehicle hits something.They aren’t
designed to inflateat all in rollover, rear, sideor
low-speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained
occupants, Next Generation frontal airbags may
provide less protection infrontal crashes than
more forceful air bags have provided in the
past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflateonly in
moderate tosevere crashes where something hits
the sideof your vehicle. They aren’t designed to
inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in yourvehicle should wear asafety
belt properly whether or notthere’s an air bag
for thatperson.
--
1-20
I A CAUTION:
1
A C * “TION:
AI
Both frontal and side impact
air bags inflate with
great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could
seriously injure you. This is true even with Next
Generation frontal airbags. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and duringa crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with Next Generation frontalair bags. The
driver shouldsit as far back as possible while still
maintaining controlof the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean or
on sleep against
the door.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any
air bagwhen it inflates can beseriously injured
or killed. This is true even though yourvehicle
has Next Generation frontal airbags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, butnot for young children and
infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bagsystem is designed for them.
Young children and infants
need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read
how, see the part of this manualcalled
“Children” andsee the caution labels on the
sunvisors and the right front passenger’s
safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for
malfunctions. The light tellsyou if thereis an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”
in the Index
for more information.
The driver’s frontalair bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-22
L
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panelon the passenger’s side.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag
is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closestto the door.
The driver’s side impact air bag
is in theside of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-23
A
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
or it
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attachor put anythingon the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
design, so that it can be somewhat above or below
this
range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will
be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are not designed to inflate
in rollovers,
side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would
not help the occupant.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air
bags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe side
crashes involving afront door. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”The threshold level canvary
with specific vehicle design.Side impact air bagsare not
designed to inflatein frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
When should an air bag inflate?
help the occupant.A side impact air bag will only
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck.
are designedto inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
In any particular crash, noone can say whether an air
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.For
designed “threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight
frontal air bags, inflation is determined
by the angle of
into a wall that doesn’t move
or deform, the threshold
the impact and how quickly
the vehicle slows down in
level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle bags, inflation is determined by the location
of the
impact and how quicklythe side of the vehicle deforms.
1-24
What makes anair bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is ain
crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags,
the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all partof the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the
side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisionsfor the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
How does an air bag restrain?
After an air baginflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
inflated. Some componentsof the air bag module-- the
even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside instrument panelfor the rightfront passenger’s bag, the
side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and
of the vehicle.The air bag supplements the protection
right front passenger’s side impact air bags
-- will be
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute theforce of
of the bag that come into
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,hot for a short time. The parts
contact
with
you
may
be
warm,
but not too hot to touch.
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
bags would not help you
in many typesof collisions,
vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the
primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in vehicle, nor doesit stop people from leaving the vehicle.
many typesof collisions, including frontalor near
1-25
A CAUTIOD
When a.nair bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for
people witha historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should getout as soon as itis safe to doso.
If you havebreathing problems but
can’t get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by openinga window or a door.
Your vehicle has afeature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when
the frontal
air bags inflate (if battery power
is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and
interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
1-26
0
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t getthem,the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will includeair bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual
for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readinessof the system, when
the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag
system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering
for the driver’sor the
right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag
covering on the driver’s
and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace theair bag
module inthe steering wheel, both theair bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s side impactair bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
For up to10 seconds after the ignitionkey is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflateduring improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates.Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare
probably part of the air bag systems.Be sure to
follow proper service procedures,and make sure
the person performing work
for you is qualified
to doso.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle.Your dealer and the Seville Service
Manual have informationabout servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems.To purchase a service manual,
see “Service and Owner Publications” the
in Index.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengersto buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they canstrike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-27
Rear Seat PassengerPositions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All three rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
2. h s h the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
1-28
If the belt stops beforeit reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate andkeep pulling until you can buckle it.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt asyou pull up on the shoulder part.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
If the beltis not long enough,see “Safety Belt
Extender” in the Index. Make surethe release button
on the buckleis positioned so you would beable to
unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-29
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on
the hips, just touchingthe thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks
if there’s a sudden stopor a crash.
Children
Smaller Childrenand Babies
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult
size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size
of the traveler
changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and in
every Canadian provincesays children up to someage
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
IA CAUTION:
I
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. This istrue even though your vehicle
has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection
for adults, but not for young childrenand
infants. Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag system is designed
for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a childrestraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your
vehicle.
1-31
U
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child
or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraint will say whetherit is
the right type and sizefor your child.A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might notstay low onthe hips,as it
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be over the
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the beltwould apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough
for one is always properly
restrained m a child or infant restraint.
1-32
Infants need complete support, including support
for the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the restof its body. In a crash,an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settlesinto the restraint,so the crash
forces can be distributed across the strongest of
part
the
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby should be
secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This
is so
important that many hospitals today won’t release a
newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant
restraint available for the baby’s
first trip in a
motor vehicle.
at only 25 mph (40km/h), a 12-lb.(5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the babyin an infant restraint.
1 A CAUTION:
I
Never hold a baby in your
arms while riding ina
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During acrash a babywill become so
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in acrash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-33
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided
by
appropriate restraints.
&." What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take
into
consideration not only the child's weight and size,
but also whether ornot the restraint willbe
compatible with the motor vehicle in whichit will
be used.
for use
An infant car bed(A) is a special bed made
in a motor vehicle. It's an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on
a
continuous flat surface. Withan infant car bed,
make sure that the infant's head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-34
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to face the rearof the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and aboutone year of age. This type
of restraint faces therear so that the infant’s head,
neck and bodycan have the support they needin a
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts
-- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the
seat part
is removable.
1-35
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright toface forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed
to help
protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, orup to around four years
of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is
designed to be used either
as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-36
A booster seat (F,G ) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four
to eight yearsof age. It’s designed to improve the
fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster seats
with shields use lap-only belts; however, booster
seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts.
Booster seats canalso help a child tosee out
the window.
1-37
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If it is, it
will have a label saying that
it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions
for the restraint.You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance
of personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions
are important,
so if either oneof these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy fromthe manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
A child in a rearfacing child restraint canbe
seriously injured if the right frontpassenger’s air
bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next
Generation frontalair bags. This is because the
back of the rearfacingchild restraint would be
very close to the inflatingair bag. Always secure
a rear-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but
before you do, always *
move the frontpassenger seatas far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the
child restraint in
a rear seat.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they
L
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
child restraintin the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing
restraint properly.
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s
why:
Keep in mind thatan unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden
stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
1-38
Top Strap
If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be
anchored. If you needto have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Cadillac dealer to put
it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
you how to doit.
Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top
strap, and thatthe strap be anchored.
If your child restrainthas a top strap, your dealer can
obtain akit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle. The
dealer can theninstall the anchor for you. In Canada,
this work will be done
for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using
the instructions
provided in the kit.
1-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See
the earlier part
about the top strap
if the child restraint has one. sure
Be
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child
in the child restraint when
and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latchplate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-40
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it
helpful to use your
knee to push down onthe child
restraint as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraintin different
directions to be sureit is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt andlet it go back all the
way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
- 1’ A child in arearfacing child restraint can be
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s
why:
seriously injuredor killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your
vehicle has Next Generation
frontal air bags. This
is because the back
of the rearfacing child
restraint would be very close tothe inflatingair
bag. Always securea rearfacing child restraint
in therear seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
pan
about the top strapif the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1-42
1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back asit will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats”in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up thelatch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt throughor
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in
front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-43
I
5. Pull the restof the lap belt all the way out
of the
retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-44
1
Larger Children
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need
to use the
safety belts properly.
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown
out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-45
Never do this.
Here two children arewearing the samebelt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a
crash, thetwo children canbe crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must beused by
only one personat a time.
1-46
&:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
belt is
but thechild is so small that the shoulder
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A:
If the child is sittingin a seat next to a window,
of the vehicle.If
move the child toward the center
the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint that
belts provide.
I
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting ain
seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt,but the shoulderpart is behind
the child.If the child wears the belt in way,
this in
a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The
belt’s force wouldthen be applied righton the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn low and snug
on the hips,just touching the child’s thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-47
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should useit.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new belts?
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goBut if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will
be just foryou, andjust for the seat in your vehicle that If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
you choose. Don’t let someone
else use it, and use it
or seat parts repaired
or replaced. Newparts and repairs
only for the seat itis made to fit.To wear it,just attach it
may be necessary even
if the belt wasn’t being used
at
to the regular safetybelt.
the time ofthe collision.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make surethe safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system
from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Tom or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any openedor broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The
air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-48
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need
to replace air bag
system parts. Seethe part on theair bag system earlierin
this section.
If the frontalair bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
kb
NOTES
1-49
$@
NOTES
ll
1-50
a-
A
‘-
Section 2 FeaturesandControls
Here youcan learn aboutthe many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained
are the instrument panel and
the warning systems that tell you if everything
is
working properly -- and what todo if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-7
2-10
2- 14
2- 14
2-16
2-17
2-18
2- 19
2-20
2-2 1
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-29
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System
Trunk
Theft
Theft-Deterrent System
PASS-Key@ I11
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-29
2-30
2-3 1
2-32
2-33
2-40
2-44
2-46
2-5 1
2-53
2-55
2-56
2-60
2-64
2-75
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Express Sunroof (Option)
Universal Transmitter (Option)
The Instrument Panel:Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC)
2-1
Keys
-
A CAUTION:
Leaving young children in
a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured
or
even killed.
They could operate powerwindows or other
controls or even make thevehicle move. If they
turned theignition toON and moved the shift
lever outof PARK (P),that would release the
parking brake.Don't leave the keys in a vehicle
with young children.
2-2
There is a master key that
works in all of the lock
cylinders (driver’s door,
glove box,trunk and
ignition). There is also a
valet key which only
operates the driver’s door
and the ignition.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft.
You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle
if you ever lock
your key inside and you may have to damage
your vehicle to get in. Be sure you have an
extra key.
Both the master and valet keys have a transponder
embedded into the key for security and theft deterrence.
The keys also come with bar
a code tag. Keepthe bar
code tag in safe
a place. If youlose your key you will be
able to have a newone made using the bar code tag.
The replacement key must have a transponder embedded
in it.
2-3
Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, you
must unlockthe doors with the key orRKE transmitter
to avoid settingoff the alarm.
Door Locks
I
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall
out. When a dooris
locked, the inside handle won't open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through an unlocked
door when you slowdown or stop yourvehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren'tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
The manual lockis on the
top of the door panel near
the window.Push the
manual lock lever downto
lock the door from the
inside. To unlock the door,
raise the lock lever.
Central Door UnlockingSystem
When unlocking thedriver's door, you can unlock the
other doors by holding the key in the turned position for
rhere are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. a few seconds or by quickly rotating the key twice in the
%om the outside, use either the key or the Remote
lock cylinder.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2-4
Automatic Door Locks
Power Door Locks
Press the up arrowon the
power door lock switch to
unlock all of the doors at
once. Press the down arrow
to lockthe doors.
Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every time
you move the shift lever outof PARK (P), all of the
doors will lock.The doors will unlockevery time you
stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK
(P).
If someone needs to getout while your vehicleis not in
PARK (P), have that person usethe manual or power
lock. When the door is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual or power lock
to lock the
door again.If you need to lock the doors before shifting
out of PARK (P), use the manual
or power lock switch
to lock the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
The rear power door lock switches only provide a
lock function asa safety feature. They will not unlock
the doors.
With the vehicle in PARK (P) and
the ignition inON,
the door locks can be programmed through prompts
displayed by the Driver Information Center(DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock
and unlock settings. For programming information,
see
“Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index.
2-5
Rear Door SecurityLock
Your vehicle is equipped
with rear door security
locks thathelp prevent
passengers from opening
the rear doorsof your
vehicle from the inside.
To use this lock:
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. You may unlock the door by using the remote
keyless entry transmitter,the front door powerlock
switch or by manually liftingthe rear door lock
knob. Open the door from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Anti-Lockout Feature
1. Move the leveron the doorall the way up to the
ENGAGED position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing tothe other rear door lock.
The rear doorsof your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this featureis in use.
When you want to openrear
a door whenthe security
lock is on:
1. You may unlock the door by using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, thefkont door power lock switch or
by manually lifting the rear door lock knob.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
Leaving your key in any ignition position with any door
open will disable the use of the power door lock
switches and the remote keyless entry lock function. If
you closethe doors, you can lock them by using the
power door lock switchesor the RKE system. It is
always recommended that you remove
the ignition key
when locking your vehicle.
The anti-lockout feature can be overridden by holding
the power door lock switch
for three secondsor longer.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open the door,
set the
locks fromthe inside, getout and close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System
With this feature, you can
lock and unlock the
doors,
unlock the trunk, open the
fuel door and turnon your
vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 30 feet (9 m)
away using theRKE
transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
I
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause interference, and( 2 ) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
Changes or modifications to
this system by other thanan
authorized service facility could void authorization
to
use this equipment.
The range of this system is about30 feet (9 m). At times
you may noticea decrease in range.This is normal for
any RKE system. If the transmitter does not work
or if
you have to stand closer to your vehicle
for the
transmitter to work, try this:
Your RKE system is intended to be used as
a
supplementary vehicle entrydevice. It is not intended to
replace, but rather should be used in conjunction with,
a
door lock key.It operates ona radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
This device complies with Part15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and ( 2 )this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause
undesired operation.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealeror a
qualified technician for service.
2-7
Operation
The numbers on the backof the RKE transmitter
correspond to Driver 1 and Driver2. See “Memory
Seat and Personalization”in the Index. Remote
confirmation is not operational if any door
is open.
Resynchronization
Pressing the transmitter buttons numerous times
(approximately 250 times) out of the vehicle’s operating
range may cause the transmitter not
to work. Replacing
the battery and pressing the transmitter buttons out
of
range will also cause the transmitter not to work.
If only
When you press this symbol to unlock the driver’s
the
fuel
door
button
works,
the
transmitter
needs
to be
door, the parking lamps on your vehicle will blink twice.
resynchronized to the receiver.Do this by pressing and
(You can program your vehicleso the parking lamps will
not flash. For more information on other program options, holding both theLOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
see “Remote Confirmation” in the Index.) Pressing it again transmitter for about eight seconds.You must be within
range of the vehicle.
within five seconds will unlockthe other doors. Pressing
Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the horn
this button will also disarm the optional theft-deterrent
will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash once.
The
system and turn on the interior lamps at night.
system should now operate properly. See your dealer
for
When you press this symbol to lock the doors, the
service if your transmitterstill doesn’t work properly.
parking lamps will blink once and the horn will chirp
once. (You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
will not flash andor the horn will not sound. For more
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
information on other program options, see “Remote
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
Confirmation” in the Index.)This also arrns the optional
If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can be
theft-deterrent system when the ignition is turnedoff.
purchased through your dealer. Once your dealer has
Press this symbol to open the trunk.
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only
up to
Press this button to open the fuel door.
four transmitters matched toit.
The RKE transmitter can also be used to recall the
memory seats for up to two drivers. For more information, All transmitters must be present when replacement or
additional transmitters are being programmed.
see “Memory Seat and Mirrors”in the Index.
&
9
a
2-8
Battery Replacement
Under normal use,the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the batteryis weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to
get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it’s probably timeto change the battery.
I NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
1. Insert a coininto the notch near the key ring
of the
transmitter. Turn the cointo separate the two halves
of the transmitter.
2-9
Trunk
2. Remove and replace the battery. Insert the new
battery as the instructions under the cover indicate.
3. Snap the transmitter back together and resynchronize
it by pressing and holding the lock and unlock
buttons for about eight seconds within range
of the
vehicle. Once the transmitter
is resynchronized, the
horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will
flash once.
2-10
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk
lid
open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
If you must drivewith the trunklid open or if
electrical wiringor other cableconnections must
pass through theseal between the body and the
trunk lid:
0 Make sure allwindows are shut.
”urn the fan on your heating
or cooling
system to itshighest speed with the setting
on AUTOand the temperaturebetween
65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C).That will
force outsideair into yourvehicle. See
ccComfort Controls”in theIndex.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way.
See ccEngine Exhaust” in the
Index.
Trunk Lid TieDown
Trunk Lock Release
To use this feature,
your vehicle must be
in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and the
valet lock switch must be
off. Press the release button
located below the lamp
controls onthe left side of
the instrument panel.
You can also press the trunk release buttonthe
onRKE
transmitter to access the trunk compartment.
A CAUTION:
Driving with thetrunk lid open can allow
dangerous CO (carbon monoxide) gas to come
into your vehicle.You can't see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you ever need to drive with your
trunk lid
open, then:
Make sure all windows, the rear seat
pass-through, and the sunroof
are closed.
'hrn the fan on your heatingor cooling
system toits highest speed, with the setting
on VENT. This forces fresh outside
air into
your vehicle.
Open allair ducts on the instrument panel.
Do not use the Trunk Lid Tie
Down if you are
towing a trailer,or if you are carrying a pet in
the trunk, because of the dangerof CO.
2-11
Trunk Storage System (Option)
A
This featureis used to securethe trunk lidif it will not
close completely, such as when carrying large packages
in the trunk.
1. Attach the end loopof the tie downto the retainer
located at the center
of the trunk sill (SeeView B).
2. Attach the clip endof the tie down to the D-ringon
the trunk lid. (See
View A).
3. Tighten the tie down by pulling the
free end of the
cord until secure.
4. To remove the tie down, press the clip end to release
and loosen the cord.
2-12
The trunk storage system can be used to organize many
different items inside the trunk. The storage system
(A)
is located ontop of the spare tire cover
(B).
To install the storage system:
1. Remove the mat from thefloor of the trunk. Remove
the handle from the spare tire panel and store it with
the spare tire.
2. Place the trunk storage system on the center
of the
trunk floor(the cut-out portion of the storage system
should befacing the front of the vehicle).Slide the
storage system fully forward.
3. Center the storage system access hole over the area
where the spare tire panel handle was located.
Position the storage system as needed and then
secure it with the retainer.
4. Attach the removable net tothe slots located on the
side andfront of the divider walls.
6. Replace the mat on the floor of the trunk.
There is also a small storage compartment located on the
right of the trunk inthe side trim panel.You can access
the compartmentby lifting the panel door.
Rear Seat -ass-Through Door
Once in place, the storage system can be moved forward
or rearwardfor convenience and easy accessing
of
stored items.
The following steps explain how to remove the trunk
storage systemfor cleaning or in case you need to access
the spare tire. Follow allof these steps if the storage
system is in the open position. Begin withStep 2 if the
system is already closed.
1. Fully close the trunk storage system.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slide the storage system fully forward.
Remove the retainer by turning it to the left.
Remove the trunk storage systemfrom the trunk.
Replace the spare tire panel handle.
The rear seat pass-through release is located in the
trunk. To release the pass-through door, press
the button
located inthe center of the trunk panel. Note that
the
rear-seat armrest must be pushed down
for the
pass-through door to open.You may close the door
from inside the vehicle.
2-13
Theft
Parking Lots
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number
of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put itoncan makeit
impossible to steal. However, there
are ways you
can help.
If you park in lot
a where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock
it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
0
If possible, park in a busy, well
lit area.
0
Put your valuablesin a storage area, like your
trunk or glovebox. Be sure to close and lock the
storage area.
0
Close all windows.
0
Lock the glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside,
it’s an
easy target forjoy riders or professional thieves
-- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take
it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition and transaxle will be locked. And
remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Rememberto keep your valuables outof sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-14
SECURITY
If the ignition isoff and
any dooris open, the
SECURITY light will
flash, reminding you to
arm the system.
To arm the system, dothe following:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch or
the RKE system withthe door open. The
SECURITY light should come on and stay
on.
If you activate the alarmby accident, unlockthe driver’s
door with your key.You can also turn offthe alarm by
using the unlock button of the RKE system,or by
starting thecar with a valid key.
Changes or modifications made to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to usethe theft system.
3. Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should go
off within approximately30 seconds.
Testing the Alarm
When the theft system activates, the horn will sound and
1. From inside the vehicle, roll downthe window, then
the lamps willflash for about 30 seconds when the door
get outof the vehicle, keepingthe door open.
or trunk is opened without
the key or RISE system.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock
Remember, the theft-deterrent system
won’t arm if you
the vehicle usingthe power door lockor the RKE
lock the doors witha key or usethe manual door lock. It
system and closethe door. Wait 30 seconds until the
activates only if you usea power door lock switch with
SECURITY lamp goesoff.
the door open orthe RKE system.
3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock
To avoid activating the alarmby accident:
and open the door.The horn will sound andthe
The vehicle should be locked with the door key or
hazard lights will flash.
the manual door lock switch
after the doorsare
If the alarm does not sound when
it should, check tosee
closed if you don’t wantto arm the theft-deterrent
if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To
system.
replace the fuse,see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the
0 Always unlock a door with a key or use theRKE
Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may
system. (Pressingthe unlock button on the RKE
need to have your vehicle serviced.
transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system.)
To reduce the possibility of theft, alwaysarm the optional
Unlocking a door any other way will activate
the
theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
alarm whena door or the trunkis opened.
Valet Lock
Your PASS-Key I11 system operates ona radio
frequency subjectto Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
the glovebox on the left-hand
side. Pressing this switch to
ON will disable the use of
the trunk, fuel door and
garage door opener.
Pressing this switchto OFFwill make these features
reusable. Locking the glove
box with yourkey will also
help to secure your vehicle. Note that the RKE
transmitter can't open thetrunk or fuel door if the valet
lock switchis on.
PASS-Key' 111
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key I11
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key111 is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you don't havedoto
anything different to arm or disarm the system.
It works
when you insertor remove the key from the ignition.
2-16
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must acceptany interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, (2)
and
this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operationof the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key 111 uses a radio frequency transponder in the
key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key111 system senses that someoneis
using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle's starter
and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will
stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical
key codes.
If when trying to start the vehicle,
the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY
message is displayed in the Driver Information Center,
your key should be checkedfor damage. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want tocheck the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers’’ inthe Index). If the engine still does
not start withthe other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
the
PASS-Key I11 to have anew key made.
If you are ever driving and the SERVICE
THEFT
SYSTEM message is displayed inthe Driver
Information Center orthe SECURITY light comes on
and stays on, you will be
able to restart your engineif
you turn it off. Your vehicle is not protectedby the
PASS-Key@111system at this time.Your PASS-Key@
I11 system is not working properly and must
be serviced
by your dealer.
If you lose or damage a PASS-KeyI11 key, see your
dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key 111to
have a new key made.
New Vehicle 66Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the
long
run if you followthese guidelines:
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the
first
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
for
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index
more information.
--
--
ACC: This position lets you use things like the radio and
the windshield wipers when the engineis off. Use ACC if
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turnyou must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is
the key to four different positions:
off (for example, if your vehicle
is being pushed).
ON: This is the position for driving.
OFF: This positionlets you
turn off the engine and
START This starts the engine.
remove the key.It doesn’t
lock the steering wheel.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Ignition Positions
The following accessorieson your vehiclemay be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned from
ON to OFF:
Cellular Phone (If Equipped)
Radio
PowerWindows
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
Express Sunroof (Option)
If your key seems stuck in OFF and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
-
2-18
~
Power to these accessories stops after10 minutes or if
any dooris opened. If you want powerfor another
10 minutes, close all the doors, turn the ignition
key to
ON and then backto OFF. If the cellular phoneis being
used while Retained Accessory Power
is in effect, the
timer is suspended (to avoid interruption
of the call).
The timer resets to10 minutes at the end of the call.
Starting Your Engine
Starting Your Northstar V8 Engine
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
-- that’s a
Your engine won’t start in any other position
safety feature. Torestart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition keyto START. When the engine starts,let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
I NOTICE:
I
Don’t try to shift to
PARK (P)if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
I NOTICE:
I
Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause yourbattery tobe
drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your startermotor. Wait about
15 seconds between eachtry to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key
in
START for about three seconds ata time until your
engine starts. Wait about15 seconds between each
try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2-19
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again,do the same thing.
Engine CoolantHeater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0°F (-18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help.You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
I NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in your vehicle. If youadd electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform
properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-20
I
A CAUTION:
Automatic TransaxleOperation
several
different
There
are
positions
PARK (P): This locks the
front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you
start the engine because
your vehicle can’t
move easily.
Plugging the cord into
an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock.Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord intoa properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sureto unplug and
store the cord asit was before to keep
it away
from moving engine parts.If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends onthe outside temperature,the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealerin the area where you’ll
be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that
particular area.
lever.
for
shift
the
A CAUTION:
I
It is dangerous to get out
of your vehicleif the
shift leveris not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-21
REVERSE (R): Use this gearto back up.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your
parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully PARK
in
(P) before
starting the engine.Your Cadillac hasa brake-transaxle
shift interlock.You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in the ON position. If you cannot shift the
shift lever all the wayinto PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever push the
shift lever all theway into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
2-22
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE(R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage yourtransaxle.
Shift to REVERSE
(R) only after yourvehicle
has stopped.
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back forth
and to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle. See“If You’re Stuckin Sand, Mud, Iceor
Snow” in the Indexfor additional information.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels.
To restart when you’re
already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only. Also use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed.
NOTICE:
Shifting outof PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engineis “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unless your foot
is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose controland hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of
PARK (P)or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
OVERDRIVE (@):This position is for normal driving.
If you need more powerfor passing, and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
0 Going about 35 mph (55 M)or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transaxle will shift down
to the next gear and
have more power.
If your vehicle seems to
start up rather slowly, or
if it doesn’t seem to shiftgears as you accelerate,
something may be wrong with
a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged.So if this happens, have
your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you
can use SECOND (2)when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and OVERDRIVE (@)
for higher speeds.
Note that if the traction control switch off,
is your
vehicle will notgo into FIRST (1) gear and the vehicle
will acceleratefrom stop more slowly.This can help in
deep snow or mud conditions. When the traction control
is turned off, a message will belit on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
THIRD (3): This position is also used
for normal
driving, however,it offers more power and lower
fuel
economy than OVERDRIVE(a).
2-23
Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of
OVERDRIVE
(a):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power.
You
can use SECOND(2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as yougo down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes
off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t shift into SECOND(2) unless you are going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage yourengine.
2-24
1 S 4 ’ Ti):This position gives you even more power
than SECOND(2). You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow ormud. (If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (l), the transaxle won’t shift into gear until
the
vehicle is going slowly enough.)
1 NOTICE:
’’
’
~
~~
~~
~
~
If your frontwheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happenif you were stuck in
very deep sandor mud or were up againsta solid
object. You could damage yourtransaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could cause overheating
and damage
the transaxle.Use your brakes tohold your
vehicle in position on ahill.
Parking Brake
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot and Dush down the
parking drake pedal with
your left foot to set the
parking brake. If the
ignition is on, the PARK
indicator light should come
on. If it doesn’t, you need to
have your vehicle serviced.
If the parking brake has not been fully released and you
try to driveoff with the parking brake on, thePARK
indicator light comes on andstays on. See “Parking Brake
Indicator Light”in the Index for more information.
When you shift out ofPARK (p) or NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine is on, the parking brake should release.
If it doesn’t,you can manually release the parking brake.
I
I
I
I
1
Always shift toPARK (P) before pulling the
manual release lever.If your hand or armis in
the way of the pedalyou could be hurt. The pedal
springs back quickly. Keep your hand and arm
away when youuse the manual release lever.
2-25
Before releasingthe manual parking brake, be sure
to putthe vehicle in PARK (P) and turn the ignition
to OFF.
Reach under the driver’s side of the instrument panel
and pull down on the manual release lever, which
is
located rearwardof the parking brake pedal. A yellow
tab is attached to the manual release lever.If the parking
brake does not release, you should have your vehicle
towed to your dealer for service.
NOTICE:
Driving with theparking brakeon can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have to
replace them andyou could alsodamage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a see
hill,
“Towing a Trailer”in the Index. This section shows
what to dofirst to keep the trailerfrom moving.
26
Shifting Into PARK (P)
’ A CAUTIO,.:
I
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured.
To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in theIndex.
Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal
down with your
right foot.
P
a
3
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
0
Push the shift lever all the way toward the front
of your vehicle and to the left.
With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
Leaving Your VehicleWith the
Engine Running
I
I
I
U:
It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with the
engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running,it could
overheat andeven catch fire.You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle
is in PARK (P) and your
parking brakeis firmly set before you leave
it.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with
the ignition keyin your
hand, your vehicle isin PARK (P).
2-27
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and don’t
you shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how,see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index.
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fullyapply your regular brakes
before you can shift fromPARK (P)when the ignition is
in ON. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you ever
hold the brake pedal down butstill can’t shift outof
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anotherPARK (P), try this:
vehicle push yours little
a
uphill to take some
of the
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF. Open and closethe
pressure from the parking pawl the
in transaxle, so you
driver’s door to turnoff the RAP feature.
can pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
2. Apply and hold the brake until the endof Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
2-28
Parking Over ThingsThat Burn
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don'tpark
over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can't seeor
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming if:
in
0 Your exhaust system soundsstrange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged whendriving
over high points on the road
or over
road debris.
0 Repairs weren't done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blowany
out
CO; and
0 Have your vehiclefiied immediately.
, <
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running.if you
But
ever have to, here are some things
to know.
Idling the engine with the climate control system
off could allow dangerous exhaust into your
vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in aclosed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fanswitch is at the highestsetting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.(See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-30
--
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P)with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your
parking brake after
you move the shiftlever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling
a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all power windows. Press the down
arrow to the second position to activate the
express-down feature. If you want to stop the window as
it is lowering, pressthe up arrow.
Windows
Power Windows
Rear Window Lockout
I
This isa useful featureif
you have children as
passengers. Pressing the
button down will disable the
rear passenger window
controls. A light on the
switch willlight to indicate
that the rear window
controls are disabled.
The controls are located near each window. Press the up or
down arrows on the controls to raise or lower the windows.As the driver, you will still have control
of the windows.
Press
the
button
again
to
allow
your
passengers
to use
Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power
(RAP).
their window controls.The light onthe switch goes out
When you stop your vehicle andturn the ignition key to
to indicate that the rear window controls are enabled.
OFF, you can still use your power windows. The
electrical power to operate the windows will not off
shut
until you open a dooror until 10 minutes have passed.If
you want this power for another 10 minutes, turn the
ignition key toON and back toOFF.
2-31
Horn
The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center
of
the steering wheel pad.
to a comfortable position and then release the lever to
lock the wheel into place.
Power Tilt and Telescopic Wheel (Option)
Tilt Wheel
If the power column switchis pressed up or down and
Tiltsteeringallowsyoutoadjustthesteeringwheelheldinthatposition,therewillbe
a slightmovement
beforeyoudrive.Raisingthesteeringwheeltotheandaslightpausefollowedbyacontinuousmovement
highest level gives your legs more room when you enter in the direction the switch
is being pressed. This allows
vehicle.
the
very
exit
and
fine control of
steering
the
wheel
position.
the If
Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you to switch is bumped, the column moves approximately one
bring the wheel close to you. Adjust the steering wheel degree in the direction commanded.
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
’hrn and Lane Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever the
on left side of the
steering wheel all theway up or down. The lever returns
automatically when the turnis complete.
I
A
for burned-out bulbs
Breakers” in the Index) and check
if the arrow failsto work when signalinga turn.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
When the headlampsare on,
push the lever to turn the
headlamp high beams on,
and pullit to the center
position to turn on the low
beams. This light on the
instrument panel will be
on,
indicating high-beam usage.
instrument
the on
arrow
I An
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
Flash-To-Pass
Raise or lower thelever until the arrow startsto flash to
signal a lane change. Hold
it there until the lane change
is complete. Thelever returns when it’s released.
If the turn signalis left on, a warning chime will sound
and the DIC will display TURN SIGNALON (after
driving about a mile)to remind you to turnit off.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signalingfor a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers won’tsee the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbsto help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit
This letsyou use the high-beam headlamps to signal the
driver in frontof you that you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal lever toward you briefly to
flash-to-pass. When you do:
If the headlamps are either off or in theDRL mode,
the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They’ll stay
on as long as you hold the lever there. Release the
lever to turn them off.
If the headlamps are on low beam, low beam will
remain active and high beam will
also illuminate
until you release the lever.
Windshield Wipers
I
INTERMITTENT (DELAY): Push the lever upto the
INT position, then turn the band (INT
ADJ), which is
located on the lever, to adjust
the delay time. The higher
you turn the band, the faster the wipers will move.
LO or HI: Push the lever up toLO for steady wiping at
a slow speed. Push the lever higher HI
to for steady
wiping at a high speed.
OFF: Lower the lever toits resting position(OFF) to
turn off the wipers.
To wash the windshield, press the center button located
at the tipof the lever.
Be sure to clear
ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
If the bladesdo become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
You can control the windshield wipers by moving the Heavy snow orice can overload the wiper motor.
A
lever with the wiper symbol on it. This lever
is located
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
on the right sideof your steering column. For
away snow orice to prevent an overload.
information on wiper activated headlamp operation,
refer to “Wiper-Activated Headlamps”in the Index.
MIST Pull the lever down once and releaseforita
single wipe cycle. For more cycles, hold the lever down
in the MIST position longer.
2-34
Rainsense Wipers (STS Only)
This moisturesensor is mounted on the passenger’s
interior sideof the windshield behind the rearview
mirror andis used to automatically operate the
wipers by monitoringthe amount of moisture that is
on the windshield.
I NOTICE:
The wipers must be turned
off when going
through a car washto avoid damage.
The Rainsense system can be activated by turning the It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature
(INT ADJ) can be overridden atany time by manually
wiper stalk to oneof the five sensitivity settings within
changing the wiper control to
LO or HI speed.
the INT ADJ area. The bottom INT ADJ position is the
lowest sensitivity setting. Thisallows more water to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Rotating the
ADJ settings
INT ADJ band up to the other INT
NOTICE:
increases the sensitivityof the system and frequencyof
wipes. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the
Do not place stickers or other items on the
INT ADJ to a higher sensitivity setting. An initial wipe
exterior glass surface directly
in front of the
occurs when you turn the ignition on as a reminder that
rainsensor. Doing this could cause the rainsensor
Rainsense is active. The windshield wipers also remain
to malfunction.
in a “high park” position, even when the ignition
is
turned off.
The Rainsense wipers operate
in a delay mode as well
as a continuous low or high speed depending on
the
amount of moisture and the sensitivity setting.The
MIST and “wash” cycles operate as normal and are
not affected bythe Rainsense function.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Contr-1
The cruise control lever is
located on the right sideof
the steering column.
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
The windshield washer has both a “demand” mode and a
“programmed” mode, depending on the amount
of
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of
windshield washer fluid you need.
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keepingyour
For programmed mode, press and release the button on foot onthe accelerator. This can helpon long trips.
the tipof the lever. The washer will provide a measured Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
amount of fluid to the windshield and the wiper will 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control is on,
you will
either stop or returnto your original wiping speed. For see a telltale labeledCRUISE in the instrument cluster.
demand mode, press and hold
the button until you have
enough fluid, and the wipers will either stop or return to Cruise control shutsoff when you apply your brakes.
your original wiping speed.
CHECK WASHER FLUID will be displayed on
the DIC
when the washer fluid reaches a low level.
2-36
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control canbe dangerous whereyou
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or inheavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads.On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise controlon slippery roads.
I
A CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise controlswitch on when
you’re notusing cruise, you might hita button
and go into cruisewhen you don’t wantto. You
could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise controlswitch off until you want touse it.
I
I
I
If your vehicleis in cruise control when the traction
control system beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow youto safely useit again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
I
Press the outer right button on the lever to turn on
l . the system.
2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
to
The cruise
3. Press the switch down once SETKST.
telltale will come on.
4. Remove yourfoot from the accelerator Pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing SpeedWhile Using Cruise Control
Setting the cruise control at a desired speed then
and
applying the brake will end
the cruise function.
There are two ways
to go to a higher speed:
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can push upon the cruise control switch RES/ACC
(Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second to reset.
This returns you to your desired preset speed. The cruise
telltale will come on.
Remember, if you hold the switch at RES/ACC longer
than half a second, the vehicle will accelerate until
you
release the switchor apply the brake.So unless you
want to go faster, don’t holdthe switch at RES/ACC.
2-38
Use the accelerator pedal togo to a higher speed.
Push the cruise lever(SETKST) and then release the
lever and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at
the higher speed.
Push upward on RES/ACC. Hold it there until you
reach a desired speed and then release the switch.
(To increase your speed in very small amounts, press
up one second at a time. Each time you
do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will only work after
you have set
the cruise control speed by pushing downward on the
switch to SET/CST.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
How well yourcruise control will work on hills depends
of the hills.
upon your speed, load and the steepness
When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may haveto brake or shift toa lower gear
to keep your speed down.
Of course, applying the brakes
or downshifting into FIRST(1) takes you outof cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Push the cruise lever (SETKST) down and hold it
until you reacha desired lower speed, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the cruise
lever (SETKST) down briefly. Each timeyou do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take yourfoot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to thecruise control speed you set earlier.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end
cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Press the buttonon the end of the switch.
Pull the lever (CANCEL) toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when you
turn off the cruise control or the ignition.
~~
~~
~
~~
Exterior Lamps
~
~~
~
~~~~
Headlamps
The control on theleft side
of the instrument panel
controls these lamp systems:
The control for the headlampsis on the left side
of the
instrument panel.Turn the lamp controlknob all the
way to the right to turn the headlamps
on and all other
lights that turn on with the parklamps. Turn the control
knob all the way to the left to turn
the headlamps off.
The lightson indicator is on if the headlamps are on.
WiperActivated Headlamps
This featureturns on the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been
in use for
approximately six seconds.
0
Headlamps
0
Taillamps
0
Parking Lamps
0
Sidemarker Lamps
0
License Plate Lamp
0
Underhood Lamp
0
Fog Lamps (STS Only)
0
Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Courtesy Lamps
0
Instrument panel backlighting will dim only when
it is
dark outside.
2-40
To operate the wiper-activated headlamps, the twilight
sentinel must be on.
If the wiper-activated headlamps
are on and the ignition switch
is turned to ACC, the
wiper-activated headlamps will continue. When you
turn the key to OFF, the wiper-activated headlamps will
immediately turn off.
The wiper-activated headlampswill turn off if you turn off
the twilight sentinel orthe windshield wipers. I€turned off
by deactivating the twilight sentinel, a HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will be displayed.
Parklamps
Turn the lamp control once to the
right to turn onthe
parklamps, taillamps, markerlamps,license lamp and
underhood lamp. The lights on indicator willbe on if the
parklarnp switchis on. Turn to the left to turn these
lights off.
Lamps On Reminder
You will hear a warning chime
if you open the driver’s
door while leavingthe lamps on and the manual
headlamp or parklamp control is activated. An exception
to thisis when you’re using twilight sentinel, iforthe
ignition is on.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make
it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL canbe helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can
be especially helpful inthe
short periods after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when:
0
0
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
the transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps (at
reduced brightness) willbe on. No other exterior lamps
such as the parking lamps, taillamps,etc. will be on
when the DRLare being used. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.
When the twilight sentinel switchis on and it’s dark
enough outside, the high-beam headlamps
(at reduced
intensity) will turn off and normal low-beam headlamp
operation will occur. When
the twilight sentinel switch
is on and it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps
will go off, and the high-beam headlamps at reduced
brightness will take over.
If it’s dark outside and
the twilight sentinel controlis
off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
display on the DIC. This message informs the driver that
turning on the exterior lampsis recommended even
though the DRLare still illuminated. It has become dark
enough outsideto require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps. Turning on the twilight sentinelthe
or
headlamp switch will deactivate theDRL and remove
the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message.If the
parking lamps or the
fog lamps were turned on instead,
the DRL will still deactivate and the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will continue tobe displayed.
2-41
To idle your vehicle withthe DRL off, turn off the
twilight sentinel and shiftthe transaxle into PARK (P).
Placing your vehicle inPARK (P)disables theDRL.
The DRL will stay off until you shiftout of PARK (P).
To drive your vehicle with theDlU off, turn off
the twilight sentinel and manually turn
on the
parking lamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need
it.
Fog Lamps (STS Only)
Use thefog lamps for better vision in foggyor misty
conditions. When you push thefog lamp switch located
next to the headlamp switch, a small indicator light and
the LIGHTSON and FOG LAMP ON telltales on the
instrument panel cluster will tell you that fog
thelamps
and the parking lampsare on. Pushing the fog lamp
switch again will turn them off.
If you switch on the high-beam headlamps, the
fog
lamps will turn off. They’ll turn back
on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps. You can use thefog
button to turn the fog lamps on
or off when the
parklamps or headlamps areon.
2-42
When the twilight sentinelis on and the fog lamp switch
is activated, thefog lamps, headlamps and parking
lamps will remainon.
Cornering Lamps
The cornering lamps come
on when the headlamps or
parking lamps areon and you signal a turn. They
provide more lightfor cornering.
Twilight Sentinel
The controlis below the
headlamp knob. It
automatically turns the
lamps on and off by
sensing how darkit
is outside.
To operate the twilight sentinel, leave the lamp knob
off
and move theTWILIGHT slider control to any position
but OFF.
If you movethe control all the way tothe right (MAX),
the lamps will remain on
for approximately three
minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF
to or
ACC. If you movethe control so it is just on, the lamps
will go off quickly when youturn the ignitionout of
ON. You can adjustthe delay timefrom only a few
seconds to three minutes.
Light Sensor
If it’s dark enough outside and
the twilight sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDmessage
will display on the DIC. This message informs the
driver that turning on
the exterior lampsis
recommended (it’s become dark enough outside to
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps).
Turning onthe twilight sentinel,the headlamp switch or
the fog lamp switch will removethe HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message.
The light sensor for the DRL and the twilight sentinelis
located on the driver’s side
of the front defoggergrille.
If you cover the sensor,it will read “dark” and the lamps
will come on.
2-43
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parklampsor headlamps control has been
turn off approximately 10
left on, the exterior lamps will
minutes after the ignitionis turned to OW. This protects
draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the
If you need to leave the
headlamps or parking lamps on.
lamps on for more than10 minutes, use the manual control
to turn the lamps back on.To delay the lamps from turning
off, see “Twilight Sentinel’, in theIndex.
the button lightly to release it to the outward position.
Tum
to the left to dirn and to the right to brighten the lighting.
Interior Lamp Switch
The interior lamp switch,
located in the overhead
console, has three positions:
OFF, AUTO and ON.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
With the parking lamps on,
the instrument panel
lighting automatically dims
when it becomes dark
outside and brightens when
it becomes light outside.
When it’s dark,and if the parklampsare on, the brightness
control canbe manually adjusted by using the control
Push
located to the right of the twilight sentinel control.
2-44
For the lamps toturn on automatically, place the control to
AUTO. With the switch in the
AUTO position and the front
door opened, the overhead console light, front hush panel
lamps, and rear footwell lampsin the door will come on.
When the rear door
is opened, all the fiont door lighting and
rear overhead lamps will come on.
When the switch in
is the ON position, the courtesy lamps are
off. (All
turned on.In the OFF position, the lamps are turned
automatic interior lighting functions are terminated.) When
is in the OFF position, only the driver
the interior lamp switch
door switch and ignition switch backlighting functions
will operate.
Illuminated Entry
Reading Lamps
The illuminated entry system turns on the courtesy
lamps and the backlighting to
the driver's door switches
and tothe ignition key when adoor is opened or if you
press the RKE transmitter unlock button.The
illuminated entry system works with
the light sensor and
it must be dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps or
backlighting to turn on.The courtesy lamps turnoff
approximately 25 seconds afterthe last door is closed or
after the ignition keyis placed inthe RUN position orif
the RKE transmitter lock button is pressed.
The reading lamps are located in the roof. These lamps
and the interior courtesy lamps come on when any door
is opened andit is dark outside. The rear lamps come
turn
on when a rear dooris opened. Press the button to
them on. Pressit again to turn themoff.
If the reading lamps areleft on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to
monitor the vehicle electrical load and determine when
Parade Dimming
the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During
This feature prohibits the dimmingof the instrument
times of high electrical loading, the engine
may idle at a
panel lights during daylight while the parking lamps
are
higher R€" setting than normal to make sure the battery
on. This feature works with the light sensor and is fully
charges. High electrical loadsmay occur when several
automatic. When thelight sensor reads darkness outside, of the following are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog
the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Backlighting lamps, rear window defogger, high blower fan, heated
to the instrument panel will
also turn on.
seats and engine cooling fans.
2-45
If the battery continues to discharge, even with the
engine idling at a higher
RPM setting, some electrical
loads will automaticallybe reduced. When this occurs,
the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to
Mirrors
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm as
they usuallydo and the fan blower may cut back to a
lower speed. For more battery saving information, see
“Battery Saver Active Message” in the Index.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
I
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage door
opener. When the ignition is turned
off, the power to
these features will automatically
turn off after
10 minutes. Power will be restored
for an additional
Your vehicle has an automatic electrochromicdayhight
10 minutes if any dooris opened, the trunk is opened or rearview mirror.
the courtesy lamp switchis turned on.
When this featureis turned on, the mirror automatically
changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you.
A
photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark
outside. Another photocell built into the mirror
face
senses when headlamps are behind you.
2-46
At night, when the glare istoo high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced.
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
with Compass (IfEquipped)
Your vehicle may have anelectrochromic inside
rearview mirror with a compass.
Mirror Operation
To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press AUTO.
To turn off automatic dimming, press OFF. The
indicator light will be illuminated when this feature
is active.
L
1
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.
When set in theMIRROR position, this mirror
automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you.
The mirror also includes an eight-point Cti~pa"ssdisplay
in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle
is driven.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar Compass Operation
material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray
Press theCOMPASS switch once to turn the compass on
glass cleaner directlyon the mirror as that may cause the or off.
liquid cleaner toenter the mirror housing.
When the ignition andthe compass feature are on, the
Mirror Operation
compass will show two character boxes
for
approximately
two
seconds.
After
two
seconds, the
The right sideof the switch locatedat the bottomof the
mirror will display the compass heading.
off. To
mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and
turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
MIRROR.
Compass Calibration
To turn off automatic dimming, pressMIRROR again.
The indicator light will be illuminated when this feature If, after two seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (“N’ for North, for example), there
is active.
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
Time Delay
compass. Such interference may be caused
by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
“C” should ever
similar magnetic item. If the letter
to
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back
appear in the compass window, the mirror
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing
of
needs calibration.
the mirroras you drive underlights and through traffic.
The mirror can be calibrated in one
of two ways:
Cleaning the Photocells
Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean
the
until the display reads a direction, or
photocells when necessary.
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.
2-48
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
Compass Variance
on the following zone map.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance
cross-country trip,it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance the
is difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance,
your compass couldgive false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMPASS button located atthe bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button until a zone
number appears inthe display.
4. Press the COMPASS buttonon the bottom of the
mirror untilthe new zone number appears in
the
display. Afteryou stop pressing the button, the
display will show a “C” and will need recalibration.
2-49
PowedHeated Remote Control Mirror
Your vehicle has a remote
mirror control locatedon
the driver’s door armrest.
Move thelefthight select
switch located beneaththe
mirror control to choose the
right or left mirror.
Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust
for
the glareof headlamps behind you. This feature is
controlled by the on and off settings on the
electrochromic mirror. See “ElectrochromicDaymight
Rearview Mirror” in the Index.
Convex Outside Mirror
To adjust the mirror, move the arrow control in the
go. Leave the lefuright
direction you want the mirror to
select switch in the center position to disable mirror
movement by the four-arrow control switch. This is
helpful in preventing unwanted mirror movement in
case the controlis accidentally bumped while driving.
Adjust each outside mirror so
the vehicle is barely
visible in the mirror to maximize your side view.
The mirrors can also be programmed
for personalizauon
and parallel parking feature
if you havethe optional
memory package. For more information, see “Memory
Seat and Mirrors” and “Memory and Personalization
Features” in the Index. For infomation on the heated
outside mirrors, see “Rear Window Defogger’’ in
the Index.
2-50
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.A convex
mirror’s surface is curvedso you can see more from
the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a
dimming feature.
A CAUTIC) r:
I
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
you
If you cut too sharply into the right lane,
could hit a vehicle
on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Curbview Assist Mirror(If Equipped)
Storage Compartments
If your vehicleis equipped withmemory mirrors, it will
mirror feature.
also be equipped with the curbview assist
This feature will cause the passenger mirror to tip when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).This feature is
especially useful in allowing you to view
the curb when
you are parallel parking.If further adjustmentis needed
after the mirroris tipped, the mirror switch may be used
to adjustthe mirror. If the mirror switch is pressed while
the passenger mirror is tipped,
the mirror will move in
that direction, but will return its
to original position once
the vehicle is shifted outof REVERSE (R).
Glove Box
Once the shift lever
is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and
a five second delay has occurred,
the passenger side
mirror will return toits original position.
To program the feature, see “Curbview Assist Mirror”in
the Index.
The glove boxis located infront of the passenger’s seat.
To lock the glove box door,insert the master key into
the lock cylinder and
turn it to the right. Turn
the key to
the left to unlock the door.
Map Pocket
The mapktorage pocketsare located on each front door as
well as on the passenger’s and driver’s front seatbacks.
Center Console StorageArea
Rear StorageArmrest
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear seatarmrest which
includes an open storage compartmentand a dual
cupholder that unfolds for use. To open, lift the
front edge.
Convenience Net
The conveniencenet is inside the backwall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can
help keepthem from falling over during sharp
turns or
quick startsand stops.
The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them inthe
trunk as far forward asyou can. When not using the net,
hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sillplate.
Your vehicle isequipped with a full front consolewith
shift lever.
The console comeswith a storage tray, a storage
compartment for CDs or tapes, a dual cupholder that
unfolds, an optional phone and an armrest. The
cupholder can be opened by pressing on the surface
panel located in front of the armrest. Closethe lid
to secure.
2-52
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
(Option)
The ashtrays and cigarette lighters may be ordered
through your dealer.To use the ashtray, press onthe
cover of the console located below the climate control
system to reveal thefront ashtray. To clean the ashtray,
lift it out by pulling on the snuffer.
To use the rear ashtray,
lift the lid. For more
information, see your dealer.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers or other flammable items
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them, causing a
damaging fire.
Note that power to the cigarette lighter will shut
off
10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff. This helps to
prevent battery drainage. For more information, see
‘?nadvertent Power Battery Saver”in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
If you do, it won’t be able to
while it is heating.
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
Swing downthe visor to block out glare.It can be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side.
When moved tothe side, the sun visor will also move
forward and rearward. The sun visors also slide to block
The front cigarette lighter is located near the ashtray. sunlight when needed.
The sunshades are equipped with
Press it all the way in and release. It will pop back by a storage
flap that can be used for small items such as
itselfwhenit’sready
to light. You mayalsohaveatolltickets.
lighter on the backof the center console near the rear
There is also a secondary visor attached separately to
seat air outlet.
the headliner.
2-53
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Remote Door unlock
Turn the sunshade downand lift the cover to
see the
mirror. Move the slide switch up or downto brighten or
Theft DetectiodNotification and
Stolen-Vehicle Tracking
dim the lamp.
Automatic Notification of Frontal Air Bag
Deployment
Cellular TeleI '>one (Option)
Concierge/Customer Convenience Services
Your vehicle has been prewlredfor dealer installationof
a dual-mode (analog/digital) cellular telephone. A fixed For more information, contact your dealer.
mobile or a portable hand-held system are available.
Either system has steering wheel telephone controls and Assist Straps
information output throughthe DIC. Voice activation
An assist strap above each door can be used when
and hands-free operation are standard features. For more getting outof your vehicle.
A user's guide is
information, contact your dealer.
provided with the telephone.
Garment Hooks
OnStar System (Option)
This system may be ordered through your dealer if you
have the optional fixed cellular telephone. The
24 hours a day:
following services are available
0
Roadside Service with Location
Emergency Services Button
2-54
For your convenience,a garment hookis attached to the
rear assist strap.
Floor Mats
Your vehicleis equipped with rubber-backed front and
rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and
using a spot cleaner,if necessary. Do not machine wash.
Express Sunroof (Option)
There are two control
switches to operate the
sunroof. The control
switches work only when
the ignition is on or when
the ignitionis off and the
Retained Accessory Power
is active.
The roof switch has
positions for opedclose
and express open. The
vent switch has positions
for vent opedclose.
Press and hold the roof switch rearward to first
the
position to open the glass panel and sunshade.
The
sunshade can also be opened or closed by hand.
To close
and hold the roof switch forward.
the glass panel, press
Press and release the roof switch rearward
to the second
If you want to
position to express open the glass panel.
stop the glass panelin a partially open position, press
either switchin any direction. Note that if you press and
hold the roof switch in the express open position for more
than one second, thesunroof will operate manually.
To vent, press and hold the vent switch.
The sunshade
must be opened by hand.To close, press and hold the
vent switch.
2-55
Universal Transmitter (Option)
The transmitter will learn and transmit
the frequencies
of most current transmitters andis powered by your
vehicle’s battery and charging system.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must acceptany interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
This device complies with
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this devicemay not cause interference, and(2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
by other than
Changes and modifications to this system
This transmitter allows you to consolidate the functions an authorized service facility could void authorization to
of up to three individual hand-held transmitters. It will use this equipment.
operate garage doors and gates, or with the accessory
package, other devices controlled by radio frequency
such as home/office lighting systems.
2-56
Programming the Transmitter
Do not usethe universal transmitter with any
garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
Turn the ignition off while programming the transmitter.
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed toStep 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter
until the light onthe transmitter beginsto flash
rapidly (approximately20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settingsfor all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want
to program.
3. Hold the endof the hand-held transmitter against the
front surface of the universal transmitterso that you
can still see the amber light.
4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on
the universal
transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through
Step 5.
5. Hold down both buttons until you see thelight on
the universal transmitter flash slowly and then
rapidly. The rapid flashing, which could take up to
90 seconds, indicates that the universal transmitter
has been programmed. Release both buttons once
the
light starts to flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
If you still cannot
hand-held transmitter is not dead.
program it,rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The universal transmitter may not work
with older garage door openers that
do not meet current
If you cannot
Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult
your dealer.
Training a Garage Door Opener with
“Rolling Codes”(If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmedthe hand-held
transmitter tothe universal transmitter, see
“Programming the Transmitter” inthe Index. If you
you need to train the
have completed this programming,
garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal
transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s
manual for the proper transmitter training procedure
for
your garage door opener brand.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
universal transmitter. You may either use the universal
transmitter or the hand-held transmitter to open the
garage door.
If after following these instructions you
still have
problems trainingthe garage door opener, consult
your dealer.
Erasing Chan---
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the red light begins
to flash.
1. Locate the training buttonon the garage door opener
Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
receiver. The exact location and color
of the button
reprogrammed using the procedurefor programming the
may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have transmitter explained earlier.
difficulty locatingthe training button, refer to your
garage door opener manual.
Accessories
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
two seconds. A light indicator will
receiver for one or
begin to flash when the receiver enters the train mode.
Accessories for the universal transmitterare available
from the manufacturerof the unit. If you would like
15.
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35
3. Return to the universal transmitterin your vehicle
and pressthe universal transmitter button you have
already programmed for two to three seconds. Press
the button again to make sure that the universal
transmitter has been trained to the garage door
opener receiver. Check thatthe train was successful.
The receiver light should no longer be flashing.
2-59
h
The Instrument Panel:Your Information System
2-60
The instrument panelis designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle
is running. You’ll know howfast
of the other things you’ll need know
to
to drive safely and
you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many
economically. The main components of the instrument panel are:
13.
Outlets 1. Air
Door Release
2. Driver
Information
Center
Control
Buttons
14. Trunk
Release
15. HVAC
Controls
Wheel
Steering
SignaVLights
3. Turn
6.
4. Cluster
Horn
5. Windshield Wiperwasher Lever
17. Audio
Steering
Wheel
Controls
Switch
Heater
Seat 18. Lever
6.
Control
Cruise
ontrol
Traction 19.
Switch
7. Ignition
Vent
8. Air
20. Console Shift Lever
Dial
Control
9. Hazard
Warning
Button
Radio
10.
Controls
11. Lamp
12. Hood Release
Convenience
2 1.
Controls
Climate
22. Electronic
23. Glove Box
Storage/Optional
Ashtray
Cluster
TEMP
ON
6
$0 -$-
o(
a
SOON
SECURITY
United States version shown, Canadian similar
2-62
a
CRUISE
6
TRACTION
CONTROL
AIR
BAG
Speedometer and Odometer
Press the topof the buttonto reset the odometers. For
information on resetting these buttons,see “Control
Buttons” in the Index.
The speedometer lets yousee your speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer
shows howfar your vehicle has been driven, in either miles Display Mode
(used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
This button is located between the trip odometer button
You may wonder what happens ifa vehicle hasto have a
and theEnglishMetric display button. PressDSPL
new odometer installed. The new one may read the correct MODE to turn the backlighting and the digital speed
mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer has
image on and off.
stored the mileage in memory.
EnglisWetric Display
Trip Odometer
There are two trip
odometers, which are
indicated by TripA
and Trip B.
In order to switch from oneto the other, press theAh3
portion of the button. By pressingthis button, you can tell
A
how many miles you have traveled on either your Trip
or Trip B odometer sinceyou last set the odometer back
to zero.
You can go back andforth
from English (miles) to
metric (kilometers)by
pressing this button.
Other readings suchas temperature, fuel and trip
odometer also go back and forth between English
and metric.
2-63
Engine Speed Limiter
Vehicle Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the enginefrom operating at too
This feature prevents your vehicle from exceeding
many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s
speeds thatthe tires are not rated for. When this
rpm are critically high, the
fuel supply to the engine is
happens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut
off. When the
vehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again.shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply
will come on again. This helps prevent damage to
Tach neter
the engine.
This gage indicates the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will helpyou
locate them.
is
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
wrong beforeit becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also
save you or
others from injury.
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red area or engine damage may
occur.
2-64
Warning lights come on when there may beisor
a
problem with oneof your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.
If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be
or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to
let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when
one of the gages shows
there may bea problem, checkthe section that tells you
what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly-- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center that
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
“Driver Information Center”in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned toON or START, a chime will
come onfor about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If the
driver’s beltis already
buckled, neitherthe chime
on.
nor the light will come
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness lightthe
oninstrument
panel, which showsAIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if thereis an electrical problem.The system
check includes the air bag sensors, air
thebag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more informationon the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
2-6 -
-
Charging system Indicator Light
This lightgoes on when you
turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you
start your engine.
United States
Canada
This light will come on when you start your engine, and
If it doesn’t
it will flashfor a few seconds. Then the light should go That’s a check to be sure the light works.
come on, be sure to have
it fixed so it will be there to
is ready.
out. This means the system
warn you if something goes wrong.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag If this light stayson, you need service and you should
take your vehicle to the dealer at once.
To save your
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash
for a few
to ON. If the
seconds when you turn the ignition key
so it will be
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
ready to warn you if thereis a problem.
2-66
Brake System Warning:
It
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake sy; m is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working,the other partcan
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warninglight comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light should comeon
briefly when you turnthe
ignition key to ON. If it
doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on whileyou are driving, pulloff the
is
road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedal
go closer to the floor.
harder to push. Or, the pedal may
It may take longer to stop.If the lightis still on, have the
vehicle towedfor service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)
,aCAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Parking Brake Indicator Light
PARK
(@I
This light comes on when
the parking brake isset, and
it will stay on if the parking
brake does not fully release.
If you try to drive off with
the parking brake set, this
light will remainon.
This light should alsocome on briefly asyou start the
vehicle. If it doesn’t, have thelight fixed so it will be
ready to remind youif the parking brake has not fully
released. For more information on how to release the
parking brake, see “Parking Brake” in
the Index.
2-67
Anti-Lock BrakeSyste~
--
-
arning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
Traction ControlSystem Warning Light
TRACTION
CONTROL
Canada States United
If the light stayson, turn the ignitionto OFF. Or, if the
as
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
This warning light should comeon briefly as you start
possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine
the engine.If the warninglight doesn’t come on then,
again to reset the system. If the light
still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you’re
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock driving, theremay be a problem with your traction
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also control system and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning lightis on, the system will not limit
on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
problem withyour regular brakes.See “Brake System
Warning Light” in the Index.
The traction control system warning light
may come on
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come for the following:
on briefly when you turn the ignition keyON.
to If the
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
light doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be
related to traction control, the traction control system
ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
will turn off and the warning light will come on.
2-68
If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period
of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
-IF-TEMP
c
.
w
This light tells you that the
engine has overheated.You
should stop the car and turn
the engineoff as soon
as possible.
A warning chime should also sound if this light comes
on. As a check, the light should come on for a few
seconds whenyou start your engine.In the section
“Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the
engine is too hot.
That reading means the same thing
as the warning
In the section
light -- the engine coolant has overheated.
“Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-69
I NOTICE:
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is calledOBD 11(On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto
assure that emissionsare at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINESOON light
comes on to indicate that there
is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often willbe indicated by the
system before any problemis apparent. This may prevent
more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, asa check to show youit is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
0
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If so, reinstall thefuel cap, making sure to fully install
if the fuel
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A looseor
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly
installed should turnthe light off.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof
cargo being hauled as soon itasis possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If
the LightIs On Steady” following.
If the light continues toflash, when it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the keyoff, wait at least10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady,see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. Ifthe light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drivethe vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service centerfor service.
Did youjust drive through a deep puddle
of water?
The condition
If so, your electrical system may be wet.
will usually be corrected when
the electrical system
the light off.
dries out.A few driving trips should turn
Are you low onfuel?
As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your enginemay
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts
of
air are sucked into thefuel line causing a misfire.The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly.
It
will take afew driving trips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands
of fuel?
If so, be sure tofuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see Oil Pressure Light
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
This light tells you
if there
You may
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
could be a problem with
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
your engine oil pressure.
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.)
This will be detected by
the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more
of these conditions,
ON or
The light goes on when you turn yourtokey
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
a
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s
full tankof the properfuel to turn the lightoff.
check to be sure the light works.it If
doesn’t come on,
be sure to haveit fixed so it will be there towarn you if
If none of the above steps have made the light turn
off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the something goes wrong.
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and When the lightcomes on and stuys on, it means
or electrical
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical
You
that oil isn’t flowing through your engine properly.
problems that may have developed.
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
2-72
A CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could beburned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
Security Light
SECURITY
For information
regarding this light,see
“Theft-Deterrent System”
in the Index.
Fog Lamp Light (STS Only)
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not coveredby
your warranty.
This light will comeon
when the fog lamp button
is pressed. For more
information about the fog
lamps, see “FogLamps” in
the Index.
2-73
Lights On Reminder Light
Fuel Gage
I
I
ON
b
E
United States
Canada
This is a telltale that comes on whenever the parking
lamps are on,so that you know your lights are on.
Cruise Control Light
CRUISE
This light comes on
whenever you set your
vehicle’s cruise control.
FUEL
United States
FUEL
Canada
The fuel gage shows approximately how
much fuel is in
the tank. It works only when the ignition
is in ON.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage.
All of these situationsare normal and do not indicate
that anythingis wrong.
0
At the gas station the gas pump shutsoff before the
gage reads F.
0
The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly or
accelerate quickly.
GAL FUEL USED on the Driver Information Center
does not correspond exactly the
to amount of fuel
remaining as shown onthe fuel gage.
Continuous Variable Road Sensing
Suspension (CVRSS)
The CVRSS automatically adjusts the
ride of your
vehicle. Automaticride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor
the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determinethe proper system response.If the
controller detects a problem within
the system, the DIC
will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYS message.
If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced
at
your dealership.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status
of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DICis also used to display driver
personalization features and warninghtatus messages.
Memory and Personalization Features
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have memory personalization.
Memory settings that have been previously programmed
(HVAC settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting
choices, remote confirmation choices, seat positions,
column positions,mirror and programmable automatic
door lock choices) can be recalled
by pressing the
unlock button on theRKE transmitter orby placing the
key in your vehicle’s ignition.
To begin programming,the ignition must be in ON, your
vehicle in PARK(P), and if your vehicle has memory,
press the appropriate memory button“1” or “2”, located
on the driver’s door panel, prior
to programming. Press
the INFO button one or more times untilthe FEATURE
PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the Driver
ON/OFF
Information Center (DIC) display. Press the
button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING.
To exit,
press the INFORESET button.
2-75
Remote Recall Memory(If Equipped)
Auto Exit Seat(If Equipped)
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one
or more
times until theREMOTE RECALL MEMORY prompt
appears. To turnthe feature on, press the ON/OFF
button untilON is displayedon the DIC. The seat and
mirror memory settings that have been previously
programmed can be recalled by pressing the unlock
button on theRKE transmitter. The column will move
when the key is inserted in the ignition and moved to
ON. To turn the featureoff, press the ON/OFF button
until OFF is displayed.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
times until theAUTO EXIT SEAT prompt shows on the
DIC display. This feature will move the seat to the
driver’s exit position when the key is movedofout
ON
(away fromSTART) and the driver’s door is opened. To
turn this featureon, press the ON/OFF button until ON
appears on the DIC.To turn this feature off, press the
ON/OFF button untilOFF shows.
Auto Exit Steering Wheel
(If Equipped)
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
STRG WHEEL prompt
times until the AUTO EXIT
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
times until theKEY IN RECALL prompt appears on the This feature will move the column to the driver’s exit
position when the key is moved out of ON (away
from
DIC display.To turn the featureon, press the ON/OFF
START) and the driver’s dooris opened.
button until ON appears.The seat and mirror memory
settings that have been previously programmed will be
recalled when the keyis inserted in the ignition.The
column will move when the key
is moved to ON. To
turn the feature off, press the ON/OFF button until
OFF appears.
Key in Recall (If Equipped)
2-76
-
Remote Confirmation
Lights Flashat Lock
This personalizationfeature allows the driver to
program the parking lampsto blink or to remain off
RKE transmitter
when the lock or unlock buttons on the
are pressed and the horn to sound when the lock button
on theRKE transmitter is pressed. Press the INFO
button one or more times untilthe FEATURE
PROGRAMMING prompt appearson the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. Press the ON/OFF
button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING. Toexit,
press the INFO RESET button.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button
one or more
times until the LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK prompt
appears on the DIC display.To turn thefeature on, press
the ON/OFF button until ON appears.
If all the doors are
closed, the parking lamps will blink once when the lock
button on the RKE transmitteris pressed. The lamps
will not flash ifthe manual parklamp switchis active.
To turn thefeature off, press the ON/OFF button until
OFF appears.
Horn Sounds atLock
Press the down arrow onthe INFO button one or more
Press the down arrow on
the INFO buttonone or more
times until the HORN SOUNDS
AT LOCK prompt
times until the LIGHTS FLASH
AT UNLOCK prompt
appears on the DIC display. To turn the feature
on, press
appears. To turn thisfeature on, press theON/OFF
the ON/OFF button until ON appears.
If all the doors are
closed, the horn will
chirp once when the lock button on
button until ON is displayed on the DIC. If all the doors
are closed,the parking lamps will blink twice when
the
the RISE transmitter is pressed. To turn the feature off,
OFF appears.
unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. To turn press the ON/OFF button until
the feature off, press theON/OFF button until theOFF
prompt appears.
Lights Flash atUnlock
2-77
Exterior Lighting
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Press the INFO button one or more times until the
This personalization feature enables the driver
to
program the exterior lamps to turn on or to remain off FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the
when using the RKE transmitter to unlock the vehicle. DIC display. Press the ON/OFF buttonto enter
FEATURE PROGRAMMING.To exit, press the INFO
During darkor nighttime conditions,if exterior lighting
RESET button.
is selected, the parking lamps, taillamps, reverse lamps,
high-beam headlamps, etc. will turn onfor about
Doors Lock in Gear
20 seconds or until a door
is opened, until the key is
Press the down arrow on the INFO button
one or more
turned out ofOFF or until the RKE is used to lock
times until the DOORS LOCK
IN GEAR prompt
the vehicle.
appears. This feature will automatically lock all doors
Press the INFO buttonone or more times until the
when the vehicleis shifted outof PARK (P). To turn the
FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt appears on the
feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) display. Press the
DIC. To turn the featureoff, press ON/OFF untilOFF
ON/OFF button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING. is displayed.
To exit, press the INFO RESET button. Press the down
arrow on the INFO button one or more times until the
Driver Unlock inPARK (P)
EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK prompt appears.
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
To turn the feature on, press
the ON/OFF button until
times until theDRIVER UNLOCK INPARK (P)
ON is displayed. To turn the feature off, press the
prompt appears. This feature will automatically unlock
ON/OFF button untilOFF is displayed.
only the driver’s door when the vehicle
is shifted into
PARK (P). To turn the feature on, press ON/OFF until
ON is displayed on the DIC.
To turn thefeature off,
press ON/OFF untilOFF is displayed.
2-78
Driver Unlock KeyOff
Curbview Assist Mirror (If Equipped)
Press the down arrowon the INFO button one or more
times untilthe DRIVER UNLOCKKEY OFF prompt
appears. Thisfeature will automatically unlock only
the
driver’s door whenthe ignition keyis moved to OW. To
turn the feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed
on the DIC. To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until
OFF is displayed.
Press the down arrow onINFO
the button one or more times
until the MIRROR TO CURB
IN REV prompts appears on
the DIC display.This feature will move the passenger’s
outside rearview mirrorto a curb view position when the
in REVERSE (R) and it will return
console shifter is placed
the mirror to thelast known driving position when the
turn this
console shifter is moved out of REVERSE To
(R).
feature on, press
the ON/OFF button untilON is displayed on
the DIC. Toturn the featureoff, press the ON/OFF button
untilOFF is displayed. For more information, see “Curbview
Assist Mirror”in the Index.
Doors Unlock inPARK (P)
Press the down arrow
on the INFO button one or more
times untilthe DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK prompt
appears. This feature will automatically unlock all doors
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). To turn the
feature on, pressON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
DIC. To turn thefeature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
Doors Unlock KeyOff
Press the down arrow on the INFO button one or more
KEY OFF prompt
times until the DOORS UNLOCK
appears. This feature will automatically unlock all doors
when the ignition keyis turned toOFF. To turn the
feature on, press ON/OFF until ON is displayed on the
DIC. To turn the feature off, press ON/OFF until OFF
is displayed.
Driver’s Names Set/Recall(If Equipped)
After the FEATURE PROGRAMMING prompt is
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the ON/OFF button is pressed, the prompts DRIVER
NO 1 or DRIVERNO 2 will appear. These prompts
correspond to which RKE transmitter button or memory
recall button has been pressed on RKE
the transmitter.
You may have your name and a second driver’s name
displayed here replacingthe prompts DRIVER NO 1
and DRIVER NO 2. A dealership can program your
vehicle to display the names you want.
The names will
is turned to ON only
appear whenever the key position
if RKE transmitters 1 or 2 are usedto enter the vehicle
or buttons 1 or 2 on the driver’s door are pressed.
2-79
Comfort Controlsand Radio System Personalization
These features allow both drivers
to personalize their
own climate control settingsas well as their radio
settings. For more information,
see “Climate Control
Personalization” and “Radio Personalization” in
the Index.
The outside temperature is always available
for display
when your vehicle is running unless an overriding
Driver Information Center message appears.
You can
change the temperaturefrom Fahrenheit to Celsius by
pressing the ENGMET (EnglisWmetric) button on the
instrument panel. For more information on the Driver
Information Center,see “Driver Information Center
Messages” in the Index.
The electronic sensor canbe affected by roador engine
heat during idling, slow driving
or when the engineis
first stared after a short trip. In order to ensure proper
automatic climate control operation, the outside air
temperature displaymay not update as quickly as
expected. This is to allow theair surrounding the outside
temperature sensorto be as close to the actual outside
conditions as possible. This is determined by how much
time has elapsed since the vehicle has been turned off
and by vehicle speed.
2-80
Control Buttons
RESET TRIPAB:By
using this button, you can
tell how far.you’ve gone
since you last set the trip
reset back to zero.To reset,
press and hold the button
until zeros appear.
If your vehicle is domestic, the trip odometer will return
to zero after 999.9 miles(1 609 km). If your vehicle is
return to zero after
Canadian, the trip odometer will
1 999.9 km (1,242 miles).The TRIP RESET button only
(A or B) that is being displayed.
resets the trip odometer
Each trip odometer hasto be reset individually.
RANGE: This message shows approximately how
many miles you can drive without refilling your fuel
tank. Oncethe range drops below40 miles remaining,
the display will showLOW.
INFO: Pressing this button up or down will display the
OUTSIDE TEMP, RANGE, MPG AVG, MPG INST,
GAL FUEL USED,AVG MPH, TIMER, B A m R Y
VOLTS, ENGINE OIL LIFE, TRANS FLUID LIFE,
PHONE (if equipped) andFEAPROGRAMMING.
INFO RESET Pressing this button will reset
the MPG
AVG, GAL FUEL USED, MPH
AVG, TIMER,
ENGINE OIL LIFE and TRANS FLUID LIFE.
For
more information aboutthe trip odometer, see
“Odometer” in the Index.
MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), then press and
hold the INFO RESET button until
0.0 MPG AVG
is displayed.
GAL FUEL USED (Reset):Press the INFO button to
display the GAL FUEL USED on the
DIC, then press
0.0 GAL FUEL
and hold the INFO RESET button until
USED is displayed.
AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the AVG MPH (Average Speed), then press and hold the
INFO RESET button until0.0 AVG MPH is displayed.
TIMER: This feature is like a stopwatch, in that you
can clock the time
it takes to get fromone point
to another.
To operate, press theINFO button to display TIMER.
Each of the fields for the hours, minutes and seconds are
two numeric digits.
2-8 1
Once TIMER 0O:OO:OO is displayed, press theON/OFF
button to startthe timing feature. Press the ON/OFF
button again to stop it.
If you will be starting and
stopping your vehicle, during a trip
for instance, the
TIMER feature will automatically start timing whereit
left off when you last stopped.To reset it, press and hold
the INFO RESET button until the display reads TIMER
0O:OO:OO. Press the INFO buttonto exit from the
TIMER function.
Driver Information Center Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed
are first
in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that
sold in Canada will have a number after each message.
This number helps to identify the message which is only
displayed in English.
-
BATTERY NOT CHARGING 7: This message will
appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the
ENGINE OIL LIFE (Reset):Press the INFO button to electrical system checked by your dealership at your
earliest convenience.
the
display the ENGINE OIL LIFE, then press and hold
INFO RESET button until100%ENGINE OIL LIFEis
BATTERY SAVERACTIVE 27: This message is
displayed. (This only needs to be reset after you have displayed when the vehicle has detected that the battery
had the oil changed.)
voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable point.
The
battery saver system willstart reducing certain features
Transmission FluidLife Monitor: Under normal
of the vehicle that you may not be able
to notice. At the
conditions, the rateof deterioration of the transmission
point that features are disabled, this message is
fluid is slow. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for
the vehicle is trying
proper fluid and change intervals. Press the INFO button displayed. It is used to convey that
off unnecessary
to
save
the
charge
in
the
battery.
Turn
to display the TRANS FLUID LEFT, then press and
accessories to allow the battery to recharge.
hold the INFO RESET button until100% TRANS
FLUID LEFT is displayed. (This only needs to be reset
after you have had the fluid changed.)
ENGMET: Press this button to display information in
the English (miles)or metric (kilometers) system.
-
2-82
-
-
CHANGE BRAKE PADS 125: This messageis used
BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 8: This message shows
that the electrical charging system is overcharging (more to notify you that the brake pads may have worn down.
than 16 volts).To avoid being stranded, have the electrical A sensor is connected to the brake pads and is triggered
when they wear toa certain point. Have the front and
system checked by your dealership.You can reduce the
rear brakes serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
charging overload by using the accessories.Turn on the
lamps and radio, set the climate control onAUTO and the
CHANGE TRANSFLUID 47: This message will
fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on.
appear when it is time to replace the transaxle fluid. See
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the Maintenance Schedule booklet for the proper fluid
the INFiO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts
and change intervals.
when the engine is running.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID 37: This message will
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 6: This message will
display if the ignitionis in ON to inform the driver that
appear when the electrical system
is charging less than
the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system
9 volts orif the battery has been drained. If this message serviced by a technician as soon as possible. See “Brake
appears immediately after starting, is
it possible that the
System Warning Light” in the Index.
generator can still recharge the battery. The battery
should recharge while driving but may take a few hoursCHECK COOLANT LEVEL 2: This message will
appear when thereis a low levelof engine coolant. Have
to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger
(be sure to
the
cooling system servicedby a technician as soon
follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to boost the
as possible.
battery after returning home or
to a final destination.If
this message appears while driving
or after starting your
CHANGE ENGINEOIL 82: This means that the life
vehicle and stays on, have
it checked immediately to
of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed
determine the causeof this problem. To help the
within 200 miles. See “Engine Oil” and “Filter
generator recharge the battery quickly, you can reduce Recommendations” in the Maintenance Schedule
the load on the electrical system by turning
off the
booklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must
accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC be reset. See “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index
on how to
by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 reset it.
to 15.5 volts.
-
-
-
-
-
2-83
-
CHECK FUEL GAGE 50: This message will appear
when the fuel supply is
less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and
the display is turned off. A single chime will also sound
when this messageis displayed.
-
CHECK GAS CAP 61: This message will appear if
-
DRIVER DOORAJAR 140: This message will
ON and your driver’s door
display anytime the key is in
is open or ajar.A chime will also sound when the
vehicle’s speed is greater than3 mph (4.8 km/h).
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2) :This message will appear
the gas cap has not been fully tightened.
You should
when the remote keyless entryis used. The message will
recheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened. show which driver is activating the personalization
feature. It will only stay on
for five seconds.
CHECK OIL LEVEL 36: For correct operationof
the low oil sensing system, your vehicle should be on a ENGINE COOLANT HOTIDLE ENGINE 44:
This message will appear when the engine coolant
level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message
may appear if the vehicle
is parked on grades.The oil
temperature is over262 OF ( 128O C). Stop and allow your
vehicle to idle inPARK (P) until it cools down and the
level sensing system does not check
for actual oil level
message is removed.Do not increase engine speed
off for a short periodof time, and
if the engine has been
the oil level is never sensed while the engine is running. above a normal idle.If it does not cool down, turn off
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears, and your the engine and haveit serviced before drivingit again.
Severe engine damage can result
from an overheated
vehicle has been parkedon level ground withthe engine
engine. See “Engine Overheating” inthe Index.
off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be
checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking ENGINE HOT-A/C OFF 16: This message displays
the oil level, be sure the engine has been for
off a few
when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal
minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
check the dipstick and add if
oilnecessary. See “Engine
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically
Oil” in the Index.
turned off. When the coolant temperature returns
to
-
-
-
-
CHECK WASHER FLUID 25: This message will
appear to indicate that you need washer solvent.
2-84
normal, theA/C operation will automatically resume.
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired as soon as
possible to avoid compressor damage.
-
--
ICE POSSIBLE 13: This message appears when
ENGINE MISFIRE EASE OFF GAS
the outside air temperatureis cold enough to create icy
PEDAL 114: An engine misfire has occurred. You’ll
road conditions.
need to easeoff the gas pedal.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE 42: This
LEFT REAR DOOR A JAR 142: The left rear door
message will appear when the engine has overheated. Stop is open or ajar when this message appears.
The ignition
and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine must be in the ON position for this message to display.
damage. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed
is
A multiple chime will also sound when
this message
greater than 3 mph (4.8 kmh).
is disp1ay.d.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE 35: If this
ENGINE POWER REDUCED 41: This message
message appears while theengine is running,stop the
informs you that the vehicle is reducing engine power
engine anddo not operateit until the cause of low oil
because the transaxleis being placed in gear under
pressure is corrected.Severe damage to the engine can
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s
result. A multiple chime will also sound when this
engine, transaxle or ability to accelerate.
message is displayed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW 11: This message serves as a
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR 141: The passenger’s
warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low.
door or rear doors are open orajar when this message
Stop for fuel soon.A single chime will also sound when
appears. The ignition must be in
the ON position for this
this message is displayed.
message to display.A chime will also sound when the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED 23: If it’s dark enough
vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
outside and the headlamps and twilight sentinel control are
off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display
on theDIC. This message informs the driver that turning on
DRL the
are
the exterior lamps is recommended even though
still illuminated. It has become dark enough outside to
This
require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps.
message willalso appear if the optional rainsense wiping
feature is on and the twilight sentinel off.
is
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RIGHT REARDOOR A JAR 143: The right rear
door is open or ajar when this message appears.
The key
must bein the ON position for this message to display.
A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed is
greater than3 mph (4.8 km/h).
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM 101: The PCM has
detected a problem within the fuel system when this
message appears. See your dealershipfor service.
SERVICE IDLE CONTROL 107: A problem with
this message displays.
the idle control has occurred when
SERVICE “AC” SYSTEM 14: This message appears
Take your vehicle to your dealership for service.
when the electronic sensors that control the air
SERVICE STABILITY SYS 54 :If you ever see the
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. SERVICE STABILITYSYS message, it means there
Have the climate control system serviced if you notice a may be a problem with your stability enhancement
drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system
SERVICE AIR BAG 83: There is a problem with the
(stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again). If
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (air bag) system when the SERVICE STABILITYSYS message still comes on,
it means there is a problem.You should see your dealer
this message appears. Let only a qualified technician
for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
work on your vehicle.See your dealership for service
A single chimewill also sound when this message
at once.
is displayed.
SERVICE CHARGINGSYS 102: This message will
display when a problem with the charging system has been SERVICE STEERING SYS 127: This message is
in
detected. Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. displayed when a problem has been detectedthe
Magnasteer variable effort steering system. Service
SERVICE ELECTRICALSYS 106: This message
will displayif an electrical problem has occurred within is required.
SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYS 84: This message is
the PCM or the ignition switch. Have your vehicle
displayed to indicate that the suspension system
is not
serviced by your dealership.
operating properly.To correct this problem, have your
vehicle serviced at your dealership.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TM
-
2-86
-
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM 34: This message
means there is a problem in the Personalized
Automotive Security System (PASS-Key111).A fault
has been detected inthe system which means that
the
PASS-Key I11 system is disabled andis not protecting
the vehicle.The vehicle usually restarts, however, you
may want to takeyour vehicle to a proper service center
before turning off the engine.
-
SERVICE TRANSMISSION 100: See your dealer
for repair.
SERVICE VEHICLESOON 3: This message is
displayed when a non-emissions related powertrain
malfunction occurs.Have your vehicle serviced bya
technician as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO 90 113: A failure in the
suspension control system has occurred when this
message appears.The PCM determines the speed to
which your vehicle is limited. Have your vehicle
serviced if this message appears.
-
-
-
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED 55 :You may see the
STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver
Information Center.It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continueto go in the direction in which you’re
steering. This stability enhancement system activates
when the computer senses that your vehiclejust
is
starting to spin,as it might if you hit a patchof ice or
other slippery spot on the road. When the system
is on,
you may hear a noise orfeel a vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on,
you should continueto steer in the direction you want to
go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or
other difficult driving situations by making
the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know that
so
something has caused your vehicle to start to spin,
you should consider slowing down.
STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY 33: This
message will appear when the Personalized Automotive
Security System (PASS-Key111) senses that an improper
ignition key is being used totry to start the vehicle.
Check the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it
may need to be replaced.If you see no damage, remove
the key and try to start the vehicle again. Ifit still does
not start,try another ignition key.
-
2-87
-
THEFT ATTEMPTED 40: This message is
displayed if the theft system has detected a break-in
attempt while you were away fromyour vehicle.
-
TOP SPEED FUEL CUT-OFF 111: This message
will appear when thePCM senses that the maximum
speed for your vehicle has been reached. The speed
of
your vehicle will surge as the fuel supply
is cutoff. This
allows your vehicle to stay in
a safe tire operating range.
The top speed is
set based on the top speed rating
of
the tires.
-
TRACTION READY 90: This message informs the
driver that the traction control system
is available. This
occurs when the tractionordoff button on the console has
been returned to ON (pressing the button onceturns the
traction control systemoff: pressing the button againturns
the system back on).This message will automatically
disappear from the display after five seconds.
-
TRACTION SUSPENDED 56: This message
displays when the traction control system has been
temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes have
overheated. This message does not indicate a problem
TRACTION ENGAGED 91 :When your traction
with your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few
control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION
minutes, the traction control system will be available
ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slippery road
again and the TRACTIONREADY message
conditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so
will appear.
adjust your driving accordingly.
This message will stay
TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE 112: This message
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
in your vehicle is too
indicates that the transaxle fluid
stops limiting wheel spin.
hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until
it cools
TRACTION OFF 89: This message will be displayed
down or until this message is removed.
after the traction control has been turned
off by the
TRUNK OPEN 24: This message indicates that the
button on the center console.
trunk is open when the ignition is on.
-
-
-
-
-
TURN SIGNAL ON 20: This message is a reminder,
after driving about a mile, that you have the turn signal
on. A multiple chime will also soundwhen this message
is displayed.
2-88
Oil Life Indicator
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It's based on the engineoil temperatures and your
driving patterns.To see the display, press the INFO
button several times until ENGINE
OIL LIFE appears.
If you see 99%ENGINE OIL LIFE, 99 percent of your
current oillife remains.
The system should indicate changing the oil between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
It may indicate changing the oil before
3,000 miles
(5 000 km) depending on your driving habits.
If the
vehicle has been driven7,500 miles (12 500 km), it will
indicate to changethe oil. If you drivein a dusty area,
3,000 miles
you should change your oil every
(5 000 km) or three months (whichever comes
first)
unless the display indicates changingit sooner.
When the oil is changed,you'll need to reset the system.
To reset, display the Oil Life Indicator
by pressing the
INFO button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET
button until the display shows100% ENGINE
OIL LIFE.
The DIC may display a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL
message. Always keep a written record
of the mileage
and date when you changed your oil.For more
information, see the Maintenance Schedule booklet.If
you see CHANGE ENGINE OIL, it means the oil lifeis
gone andyou should changethe oil right away. The
system doesn't check how much oil you have, so you'll
still have to checkfor that. To see how, see "Engine Oil"
in the Index.
2-89
b
2-90
NOTES
#z=
-.\
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section,you'll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-6
3-6
3 -6
3-7
3-8
3- 10
3- 10
3-11
3-1 1
3-11
3-16
3-20
Comfort Controls
Climate Control Panel
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defrosting and Defogging
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)
'
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc' Player (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and DigitalSignal Processing
(DSP) (If Equipped)
3-29
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-42
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-45
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc' Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing(DSP)
(If Equipped)
Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
Console-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
CD Adapter Kits
Radio Personalization (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your CompactDisc Player
Diversity Antenna System
3-1
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your electronic climate control system uses
ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.
Climate Control Panel
1
Personalization feature, you will be able to program
your preferred climate control settings by using your
remote keyless entry transmitter. See “Climate Control
Personalization” later in this section.
AUTO: The AUTO button will turn on the system
and automatically adjust the fan blower speed, air
delivery mode and temperature to your previously
programmed settings.
TEMP: This knob adjusts the air temperature coming
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-zone electronic
climate control system. This system can automatically
adjust and control temperature, fan speed, air delivery
mode, air conditioning Operation and air intake. YOU Can
use the AUTO (automatic) setting or override the
automatic operation by manually altering the controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Climate Control
3-2
through the system. Turn the TEMP knob to the right
to increase the temperature and to the left to decrease
the temperature. You may also press the TEMP knob to
turn the system on and off. (You can turn the comfort
control system on by pressing any button on the panel.
The passenger’s TEMP knob only turns off the system
of the passenger’s side.) Once the system is turned off,
fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle,
and the system will try to maintain the previously
set temperature.
Driver’s Side TemperatureKnob
youcan control the temperature of the driver’s side
independently from the passenger’s side. Turn the
driver’s side TEMP knob to the right to increase the
temperature and to the left to decrease the temperature.
Passenger's Side TemperatureKnob
The right front passenger can control the temperature
of
air for that area. (The passenger and driver knobs adjust
60 " F ( 16" C) to 90" F (32" C) independent of each
other. It is suggested, however, that the passenger's
setting stayno more thanfour degrees warmer or cooler
in temperature fromthe driver's setting.) To turn the
system on, press the passenger's side TEMP button.
Turn the passenger's side TEMP knob the
to right to
increase the temperature andto the left to decrease the
temperature. Pressthe passenger's side TEMP knob
again to turn off the passenger's
side system. If the
passenger's side is turned off, the driver's side will
control the temperatureof the entire vehicle.
Automatic Operation
When the system is set for automatic operation, sensors
will control theair delivery mode. Air will comefrom
the floor, the instrument panel
or windshield outlets. The
fan speed will vary asthe system maintainsthe selected
temperature setting.
Be careful not to put anything over the electronic solar
of the instrument panel
sensors located near the ends
near the windshield. These sensors are used by the
automatic system to regulate temperature.
To find your comfort zone,start with the 75°F (24°C)
setting and allow about30 minutes for the systemto
regulate. Turn the TEMP knob to adjust the temperature
if necessary. If you choose 60°F (16"C), the system
will remain at that maximum cooling setting and will
not regulate fanspeed. If you choose 90°F (32"C), the
system will remain at that maximum heating setting
and will not regulate fan speed. Choosing either
maximum setting will not causethe system to heat
or cool any faster.
With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor cycles when needed to cool the air. In cold
weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the
airflow will be directed out the
floor outlets. As the
interior temperature approaches a desired setting, the
blower speed will decrease.To maintain interior
to the instrument panel
comfort, the airflow may move
air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode). On bright
sunny days in cold weather, the aifflow may come out
of the air conditioning outlets( A X mode) to maintain
comfort and prevent stuffiness.
3-3
If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have itElectronic Solar Sensor
set on AUTO, the air will first flow out thefloor outlets
for a few seconds. This is normal. This is to remove hot
air from the air outlets.As the air is cooled, the airflow
will move through the air conditioning outlets.
To avoid blowing cold airin cold weather, the system
will start at reduced fan speeds until warm air
is
available. The lengthof reduction depends on the
outside air temperature, engine coolant temperature
As the
or the time since the engine was last started.
coolant warms up, the blower
fan speed will gradually
increase and air will flow from the heater outlets, with
some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under
most normal conditions.If you select defrost mode or a
manual fan speed, this function will be skipped.
If you leave your vehicle,the system will remember
the control setting the next time you start your engine,
except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition
cycle cancels recirculation. Defrost will change to
off and
automatic operation when the ignition is shut
then turned back on.
3-4
The sensor monitors the sun’s solar radiation is
and
located near the endof the instrument panelnear
the windshield.
The climate control panel uses this information to
automatically makethe necessary temperature and
airflow adjustments to maintain your comfort.
The
climate control system may supply cooler air one
to side
of your vehicle, if that side is facing the sun. Be careful
not to put anything over
the sensor on topof the dash.
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode, fan
speed, airinput and compressor operation using the
following controls.
and dehumidify the air inside
the vehicle. In the
automatic mode,the air conditioning compressor only
operates when the system determinesit is needed. The
A/C OFF function is not available inthe defrost mode.
MODE: Press this button(the right orleft arrow) to
DEFROST (FRONT): Press this button to quickly
deliver air through the floor, instrument panel or
remove fog or frost from the windshield. This setting
windshield outlets. The climate control system will stay
sends mostof the airflow tothe windshield with only a
in the selected mode until the MODE button, the
small amountto the floor outlets.
DEFROST button orthe AUTO buttonis pressed again.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
Press theleft or right arrow to cycle throughthe
the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle.
This is
following available modes.
A*
helpful when youare trying to cool the air quickly or
f
l Upper: This setting directs airflow through the
limit odors entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode,
Your vehicle is
the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool themiddle instrument panel outlets.
equipped with a driver’s side
lap cooler which will also
air. Pressing the recirculation button willchange the
come on when the upper vents are being used.
operation to a manual mode and
the air will recirculate
Le
off the
non-stop. Press this button again to turn
l f l Bi-Level: This setting directs airinto your vehicle
recirculation feature.If you noticethe windows fogging,
in two ways. Cool air
is directed to the upper portion
of
press the recirculation button toexit the recirculation
your body through thefour instrument panel outlets
mode. Recirculationis not available in the
defrost mode.
while warmed air is directed to
the floor.
N C : Press this button to turn the air conditioning
-e
compressor on andoff. When you pressthe button, an
7
. Defog: This setting directs air to the floor outlets
A/C OFF message appears onthe climate control panel’s and toward the windshield.
display. Press the button again and the air conditioner
will return to automatic control.
The system will cool
3-5
0
I#
Heater: This setting directs warmed air through
the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted
to the
windshield to minimize fogging.
8 FAN: The button with thefan symbol adjusts the
Heating
Adjust the interior temperatureto a comfortable level
and if the fan speed needs adjusting, press theorup
down arrow. Adjusting the fan speed will cancel the
cold air delay.
fan speed. Pressthe up arrow to increasefan speed and
Outside air will be brought in and sent through
the floor,
the down arrow to decrease fan speed. Press
the AUTO
air conditioning or bi-level outlets. The heater works
button to set the fan speed for automatic operation. If it
best if you keep your windows closed while using
it. In
is cold outside, the blower may not run in the maximum
automatic operation, your fan will not run at high speed
high fan speed right away. The system checks the
to minimize warm-up time.
temperature of the engine coolant to assure
it is warm
enough to provide heat. When the engine coolant is
warm, the controller allows the fan to gradually increase Defrosting and Defogging
to a higher speed. This prevents cold air from blowing Use defrost (FRONT) on cool and humid days to keep
the windshield and side windows clear. This setting will
into the passenger’s compartment. Selecting a manual
remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in
fan speed will override this feature.
extremely humidor cold conditions. If you desire to
Air Conditioning
have more air on your
feet, move the control to the
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot defog mode. You maydo this by pressing the right or
left arrow on theMODE button.
inside air escape. This reduces the time
it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed Press the fan button’s up or down arrow to control the
for the air conditioner to work
its best. Your A/C setting
blower speed. You may also adjust the temperature by
may be adjusted automaticallyor manually. It may also
turning the TEMPknob.
be set separately on the passenger’s side from the
Recirculation and theA/C OFF message are not
driver’s side.See “Climate Control Panel” earlier in
available inthe defrost mode.
this section.
3-6
.
Rear Window Defogger
The grid lines you see on
the rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
turn on the rear defogger.
With it, the rear window
and both outside rearview
mirrors are heated.
The system will automatically shut off after ten minutes.
If further defogging is desired, press the button again.
The system will automatically shut off after five minutes
for any activations after the first one.
Note that the lines along the top of the window are for
the diversity antenna and are not intended to defog the
rear window.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
I NOTICE:
Scraping the insideof your rear window could
cut and damage the heating grids. Your warranty
would not cover this damage. Don’t put decals
there because you might have
to scrape themoff.
3-7
Ventilation System
Rear Ventilation
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when
it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when
the heater or the air
conditioning fanis running.
OFF
The direction and quantityof airflow for the rear seats
can also be adjusted at the back
of the console. Heater
outlets are located under the front seatw tom the feet
of rear passengers.
The front outlets are located in the center and at each
side of the instrument panel.You can adjust the
direction of airflow by moving the center control levers
or you can stop the airflow by moving the control
dial
located on each outlet downward.
3-8
Move the fan lever to adjust the blower speed from
LO to HI. Adjust the knob to direct the air flow.
To
reduce airflow to the rear outlets, slide the fan lever
all the way to the left. Turning the
knob to OFF will
completely stop airflow, no matter where the fan
blower control is set.
~
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood andfront air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves).
The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging theinside of the windows.
0
Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps circulate air throughout
your vehicle.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed througha passenger
compartment filter, which is part
of a three-piece filter
system. The filter removes certain contaminants from
the air, including pollen and
dust particles. Reductions
in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty
areas, indicate thatthe filter needs to be replaced early.
The carbon-treated filter is located inside the air
control module, with an access panel underneath the
instrument panel near the accelerator pedal.
The
filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled
maintenance. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet
for replacement intervals. See your dealerfor details
on changing the filter.
Your vehicle will not be damaged you
if choose not to
replace thefilter once the oldone is removed. However,
the air will no longer be
filtered.
3-9
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Some heating and cooling
controls canbe adjusted at
the steering wheel. Other
touch controls operate some
audio controls. See “Audio
Steering Wheel Controls”
in the Index.
Climate Control Personalization
(If Equipped)
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest
climate control settings as adjusted the last time your
vehicle was operated. These settings include the set
temperatures for driver and passenger, air conditioning,
mode and fan speed. (This feature does not recall
recirculation or defrost modes.) This feature allows
two different drivers to store and recall their own
climate control settings. The settings recalled
by the
climate control systemare determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1”or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
TEMP: Press the up arrow on the control to increase the The number on the backof the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver1 or to driver2. After any button
temperature and the downarrow to decrease temperature.
is pressed on theRKE transmitter orthe key is placed
FAN: Press the up arrow on the control to increase in the ignition, the climate control settings will
the fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. automatically adjust to where they were last set.
The
settings can also be changed by briefly pressing buttons
1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.
8
3-10
Audio Systems
Your Cadillac audio system has been designed to
operate easily and give yearsof listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out itofif you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system
can do andhow to operate allits controls, to be sure
you’re getting the mostout of the advanced engineering
that went into it.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player(If Equipped)
Setting the Clock
Press and holdHR or MN until the time display begins
to change. Release the button you
as get close to the
correct time.The time may be set anytime the
clock is
displayed. Thereis a two-second delay before the clock
goes into time-set mode.
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press theknob again to turn the system off.To
increase volume, turn theknob to the right.Turn it to
the left to decrease volume.
3-11
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc.
The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources
are
shown on the display. If a source
is being used, it will
be underlined onthe display. If noneof the audio
sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will
appear on the display. Press this button again or
BAND to switch back to
the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silencethe system. Press
it again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and six FM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to selectA M , FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons
for more than two seconds untilyou hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds,the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
positions. Press this button
to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
is held at thefirst position for a few seconds,the radio
of
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio will go
this button tothe second position and releaseto seek to
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
the next higher or lower radio station.
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
station. Press SCAN again
to stop scanning. If a preset
scan radio stations.The radio will go to a station, stop
station has weak reception,the radio will not stopat
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
the preset station.
this button againto stop scanning.
3-12
Setting theTone
TONE: Press and releasethis button until the desired
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE) is
found. The radio keeps separatetone settings for each
band, each preset and each source.
LEVEL: After selectingthe desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
Adjusting the Speakers
4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE control
is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button toselect the desiredlevel.
Playing a CassetteTape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.The tape will
begin playingas soon as it is inserted. When one sideof
your cassette tape isdone playing, auto reverse plays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will notstart playing
until the radio is on. If you wantto insert a cassette tape
when the ignitionis off, first press the eject button.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,
TONE, LEVEL,
and SPEAKER controlsjust as you dofor the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape
is inserted.The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY willappear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
of
the tapeis playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it could be that:
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubsof the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down andtry turning the right
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check tosee if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds.
You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press theleft arrow again to return
to playingspeed.
3-13
. ..
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears onthe display,
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons totune to another
radio station while inFF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,
it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to selectionsfor a few
seconds. The tape will goto a selection, stopfor a few
seconds, then go on tothe next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
that is playing.
6 EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
off.
activated with the radio off and/or the ignition
3-1
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. Itstill
will
play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
Your Cassette Tape Player”in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold
the eject buttonfor three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
NR.
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby
Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tapefor clearer soundfor Cr02
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the
slot, label side up. The
are
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio
on and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on
the display,the disc will begin playing. Compact discs
may be loaded with the radiooff but they will not start
playing until the radio is on.
If you wantto inserta disc
when the ignition is off,first press the eject button.
TUNE-SEEE: When this button is pressed,it has
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
the same, whether
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller two positions. This button works
it is pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
button to seek tothe next or previous selectionon the
If you’re drivingon a very rough road orif it’s very
compact disc.
hot, the disc may not play.If the disc comes out, it
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
could be that:
seconds. The compact disc willgo to a selection, stop
The disc is upside down.
for a few seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
this button again tostop scanning.
0 The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
RDM: Press this button to hear
the tracks in random,
try again.)
rather than sequential, order. PressRDM again to turn
off random play.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an
error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the compact disc player to remove a compact
R W Press and hold theleft arrow to reversethe
disc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with
the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
radio off and/or the ignition off.
FF: Press and holdthe right arrow to fast forward to
another partof the compactdisc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
3-15
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
MiniDisc@Player (If Equipped)
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and MiniDisc. The audio source must
be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are shown
on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back
to the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.
3-16
positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for lessthan two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on tothe next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons
for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds,the station you set will return.
5 . Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
When battery poweris removed and later applied, you
will not haveto reset yourradio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN:Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to of
each
your preset stationsfor five seconds. The radio will go
to the first preset station storedon your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to
stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception,the radio will notstop at the
preset station.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE) is
found. The radio keeps separate tone settings
for each
band, each preset (except weather band presets), and
each source.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
Adjusting the Speakers
4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE or FADE controlis found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, pressthe plus (+) or minus (-) symbol
on this button to select the desired level.
3-17
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.
The tape will
begin playing as soon as
it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may
be
loaded withthe radio off but they will notstart playing
If you wantto insert a cassette tape
until the radio is on.
when the ignition isoff, first press the eject button.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to
see if your
tape is broken. Try new
a tape.)
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly.
The
You may use
the radio will play while the tape rewinds.
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Pressthe left arrow again to return
to playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow tofast forward to another part
While the tapeis playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL, of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
and SPEAKER controlsjust as you dofor the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a taperadio station while inFF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.
is inserted.The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
of
two positions. This button works
the same, whetherit is
the tape is playing.
pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this button
to seek tothe next or previous selection onthe tape.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
could be that:
between
each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
The cassette tapeis tight and the cassette player
sound will mute while seeking.
cannot turn the hubs
of the tape. Hold the cassette
for a few
tape with the open end down and try turning the rightSCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
seconds.
The
tape
will
go
to
a
selection,
stop
for
a few
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the button again to stop scanning.
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
Playing a MiniDisc
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
that is playing.
Insert a disc partway into
the slot, label side up. The
player
will
pull
it
in.
If
the
ignition andthe radio areon
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button the
to
and the underlined MiniDisc symbol appears on the
right of the cassette tape player to remove a tape. The
display, the disc will begin playing. MiniDiscs may be
radio will play. Eject maybe activated withthe radio off
off but they will notstart playing
loaded with the radio
and/or the ignitionoff.
until the radio is on.If you want to insert a disc when
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears onthe display,
the ignition is off, first press theeject button.
It will still
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
While a MiniDisc is playing,MD TRACK number will
play tapes,but you should cleanit as soon as possible to
appear onthe display followedby ALBUM title, then
prevent damage to the tapes and player.See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean TRACK title.The display then reverts back to showing
MD TRACK number.
the player, press and hold the
eject button for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
If you’re driving on a very rough road
or if it’s very
hot,
the
disc
may
not
play.
If
the
disc
comes
out, it
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
could be that:
NR.
background noisefrom tapes encoded with Dolby
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
and try again.)
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error can’t be
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust
to
corrected, please contact your dealer.
the type of cassette tape for clearer soundfor Cr02
cassette tapes.
R W Press and holdthe left arrow to reverse the
MiniDisc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another partof the MiniDisc. Releaseit to return to
playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has
it
two positions. This button works the same, whether
is pressed to the first or second position. Press this
button to seek to the next or previous selection on
the MiniDisc.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)(If Equipped)
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The MiniDisc will go to a selection, stopfor a
few seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hearthe tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. PressRDM again to turn
off random play.
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the MiniDisc player to remove a MiniDisc.
The
off
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio
andor the ignition off.
3-20
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob againto turn the systemoff. To
increase volume,turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.
AVC: Your system hasa feature called Automatic
Volume Control (AVC). WithAVC, your audio system
monitors the noise inthe vehicle. Then,AVC
automatically adjusts the volume level
so that it always
sounds the same to you.To use AVC, press and hold the
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
OFF appears onthe display. Then pressthe LEVEL
plus (+) symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON
will appear on the display. AVC VOLUME will appear
on the display any time you adjust the volume while
AVC is on. To turn AVC off, press and hold the
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
ON
appears onthe display. Then press the LEVEL minus(-)
symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROLOFF will appear
on the display.
SOURCE: Press this button to selecta source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc.
The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display.If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display.
If none of the audio sources
are loaded,NO SOURCE LOADED will appear onthe
display. Press this button againor BAND to switch back
to the radio.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button toselect AM, FMl, FM2
or weather.
TUNE-SEEK: When this buttonis pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the
first position to
manually tune to higheror lower stations.If this button
is held at thefirst position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
scan radio stations.The radio will goto a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must be off to use this mode.
You can set up to
24 stations (six AM, six FM1, six FM2 and six
weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds. Whenever you press that
3-21
numbered buttonfor less than two seconds, the
station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and
later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each
of
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio willgo
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. PressSCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception,the radio will not stop at the
preset station.
receive and display messagesfrom radio stations and
search for a stronger station when a station is too
weak for listening.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
which broadcastRDS information.
0RDS SELECT Press this button to use the
alternate RDS functions (RDS,
TA, MSG, PTY and
PTY > ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
RDS SELECT: will appear on
the display. The alternate
RDS functions are only available when you are using
the FM band of your radio.
RDS (1): With RDS off, press theRDS SELECT
RDS on. The
button, followed by this button to turn
RDS display will turn on.You must have RDS on to
use the newRDS functions. The RDS display will
Using RDS Mode
also turn on ifone of the other RDS function buttons
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems has been pressed on. If you are tuned to a station
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. broadcasting RDS information, the station’s call letters
When RDS ison, the radio can:
and Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s
frequency on the display. After
five seconds, the
seek only to stations with the types of programs you
the display bythe
program type will be replaced on
want to listen to,
station’s program type name.The program type and
seek to stations with traffic announcements,
program type name may be the same or different.
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
3-22
Press BAND to recall
the frequency and program type
displays. If the radio is tuned to a station thatis not
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency
will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the radio
will searchfor a stronger station in the network when a
station gets too weakfor listening. Press the RDS
SELECT button, followed by this button again to turn
RDS off. All RDS functions willbe turned off.
REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access
the region function. When anRDS station becomes
weak, this function searchesfor a stronger station within
the same network. A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down
into regions.
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic
are available to you. When the region functionon,isthe
radio only searchesfor stations in the same network and
region. You can only use the region function whenRDS
is already on. Pressthe RDS SELECT button. Then
press and holdthe RDS buttonfor two seconds.
REGION: ON will appear onthe display. While
REGION: ON appearson the display, press theRDS
button again to turn the region
function off. REGION:
OFF will appear onthe display. The region function can
be turned on again
by pressing the RDS button.
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by
this button to receive traffic announcements.
The radio
will turn on the TA display.TP will appear on the
display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the tuned station.If the current tuned station does not
to a
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek
station which does. When the radio finds a station which
broadcasts traffic announcements,it will stop. If no
FOUND will appear on the
station is found, NONE
display. WhenSEEK or SCAN is pressed withthe
traffic announcement functionon, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume called TA volume.To increase TA
volume, turn thePWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it to
the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME will appear on
the display while the volume is being adjusted.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will it,
hear
even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tapeor
compact disc is playing.If the radio tunes to a related
network station for a traffic announcement,it will return
to the original station when the announcement
is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was
being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button message is displayed, use < and > to move up and
again to turn TA off.
down the PTY list.If you pause ona PTY for three
seconds, PRESET FTY NEWS will appear on the
MSG (3): When RDS is on, if the current station has a
display. While this message is displayed, you can save
message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
the PTY ina preset by pressing one of the six numbered
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see
the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Allow three seconds
for the message to disappear if you do not want to save
display, parts of the message will appear every three
the PTY in a preset. See “Radio Data Systems(RDS)
seconds until the message is completed.
To see the parts
Program
Type (PTY) Selections” in the Index.
of the message faster than every three seconds, press this
button again. A new groupof words will appear on the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received. Each message can only be read once.
PTY (4): This button is used toturn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press theRDS SELECT
button, followed by this button.The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press theRDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn the PTY displayoff.
< PTY > ( 5 ) (6):With RDS on, press theRDS SELECT
button, followed by < or > . The PTY display will turn
on, if it is not already on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS
will appear on the display for three seconds. (The
PTY shown will be the last PTY selected.) While this
3-24
When the PTY display is on, pressSEEK and SCAN to
find radio stationsof the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used
for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
If both PTY and
FOUND will appear on the display.
TA are on, the radio will searchfor stations with traffic
announcements and the selectedPTY.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections’’
in the Index.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six F M 1 and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to selectFM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station withthe PTY you desire.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds, thePTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery poweris removed andlater applied, you
will not haveto reset your RDS presets because
the
radio remembers them.
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
even if RDS mode is turnedoff. ALERT appears on the
display when analert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements.To
increase volume, turn the
PWRNOL knob tothe right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME
will appear on the display while
the volume is being
on the
adjusted. When an alert announcement comes
tuned radio stationor a related network station, you will
hear it, even if the volume is muted orcassette
a
tape or
compact disc is playing.If the radio tunesto a related
network station for an alert announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is
playing, play will stopfor the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
by one of these buttons to displaythe time for the
current station.STATION TIME IS will be displayed.
NO STATION
If a time has not been sent to the radio,
TIME will be displayed.If you have recently tunedto
the station, you may need to wait a minute before the Setting theTone
time is available tothe radio. To set the clock to the
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
HR or
current displayed station time, press and hold
tone control (BASS, TREBLE or MIDRANGE)is
MN until TIME UPDATEDis displayed. Thereis a
found. The radio keeps separate tone settings
for each
two second delay beforethe time is updated. RDS
band, each preset (except weather band presets) and
mode does not have tobe on to use thisfunction, but
each source.
you must be tuned to an FM RDS
station.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
ALERT This typeof announcement warnsof national
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
or local emergencies.You will not be able to turnoff
the desired level.
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come
on
3-25
Adjusting the Speakers
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature used
is
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
to provide a choice of four different listening experiences: BALANCE or FADE control
is found.
TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and SPACIOUS.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE
or
DSP can be used while listening to the radio, the cassette
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to turn DSP
tape player or the CD player. Press
this button to select the desired level.
on. Press and releasethis button until you reach the
desired selection. Totum DSP off, press and holdthis
Playing a CassetteTape
button until DSPOFF appears on the display. When DSP
OFF is displayed, the system will provide the best overall With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon
as it is inserted. When one sideof
Bose@performaxe. The radio keeps separate DSP
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
settings for each band (except weather band, which is
other sideof your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
always set to TALK) and each source.
loaded with the radiooff but they will not start playing
e TALK: This settingis used when listening to
until the radio ison. If you want to insert a cassette tape
non-musical material such as news, talkshows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes when the ignitionis off, first pressthe eject button.
spoken words sound very clear.
While the tapeis playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL
and DSP controlsjust as you dofor the radio. Other
e FRONT SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
is
controls may have different functions when a tape
give the front seat occupants
the best possible sound
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
qualities. FRONTSEAT can be used at any time
for
any material. Rear seat passengers
in the vehicle may symbol. TAPE PLAY willappear on the display when a
of
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side
not getthe same effect.
the tapeis playing.
e AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
0 SPACIOUS: This settingis used to make the
listening space seem larger.
3-26
TUNE-SEEK: When this buttonis pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to thefirst or second position. Press this button
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
to seek to the nextor previous selection on the tape.
cannot turnthe hubs of the tape. Holdthe cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right Your tape must haveat least three secondsof silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work.The
hub to theleft with a pencil. Flipthe tape over and
sound will mute while seeking.
repeat. If the hubsdo not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be usedthe
in
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
player. Try a new tapeto be sure your player is
seconds. The tape willgo to a selection, stopfor a few
working properly.
seconds, thengo on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
The cassette tape is broken. (Checkto see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
R W Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The that is playing.
radio will play while
the tape rewinds. You may use
A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
the radiooff and/or the ignitionoff.
to playing speed.
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears on the display,
FF: Press the right arrow to
fast forward to another part
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
It will still
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
You may use your station pushbuttons totune to another
prevent damage tothe tapes and player. See “Careof
radio station while inFF mode. Pressthe right arrow
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
again to return to playingspeed.
the player, press and hold
the eject buttonfor three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape,
it
could be that:
3-27
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearer sound for Cr02
cassette tapes.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, first press the eject button.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.
If you’re driving on a very rough or
road
if it’s very hot, the
disc may not play.If the disc comes out,it could be that:
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet,
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fastforward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
this button to
pressed to the frrst or second position. Press
seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The compact disc will go to a selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the compact disc player to remove a compact
disc. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with the
radio off and/or the ignition off.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and
MiniDisc Player with Radio Data Systems
(RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWRNOL: Press thisknob lightly to turn the system
off. To
on. Press the knob again to turn the system
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to
the left to decrease volume.
AVC: Your system has a feature called Automatic
Volume Control (AVC). With AVC, your audio system
monitors the noise in the vehicle. Then, AVC
automatically adjusts the volume levelso that it always
sounds the same to you. To use AVC, press and hold the
OFF
TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL
appears on the display. Then press the LEVEL plus
(+)
symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROLON will appear
on the display.AVC VOLUME will appear on the display
any time you adjust the volume while AVC is on. To turn
AVC off, press and hold the TONE button until AUTO
VOLUME CONTROLON appears on the display. Then
press the LEVEL minus(-) symbol. AUTO VOLUME
CONTROL OFF will appear on the display.
SOURCE: Press this button to select
a source. Sources
include cassette and MiniDisc.The audio source must
are shown
be loaded to play. Available loaded sources
on the display. If a sourceis being used, it will be
underlined on the display.If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or press BAND to switch
back to the radio.
3-29
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
BAND: Press this button to selectA M , FM1, FM2
or weather.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has
two positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position
for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button
is released. Press
this button tothe second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this buttonfor less than two seconds to
go to a station, stop
scan radio stations. The radio will
for five seconds, thengo on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY
mode must beoff to use this mode.You can set up
to 24 stations (six A M , six FM1, six FM2 and
six weather). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select A M , FM1, FM2 or weather.
4. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttonsfor
3-30
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button
for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.
PRESET SCAN: Press and holdSCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations forfive seconds. The radio will go
to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds, thengo on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop
at
the preset station.
RDS (1): With RIDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systemsfollowed by this button to turn RDSon. The RDS
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. display will turnon. You must have RDS on to use the
new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on
When RDS ison, the radio can:
if one of the otherRDS function buttons has been
seek only to stations with the types
of programs you
pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting
waq$ to listen to,
RDS information, the station's call letters and Program
Type (PTY) will replace the station's frequency on the
0 seek to stations with traffic announcements,
display. After five seconds, the program type will be
0 receive announcements concerning local and
replaced on the display by
the station's program type
national emergencies,
name. The program type and program type name may
be the same or different. Press BAND to recall the
0 receive and display messages from radio stations
and
frequency and program type displays.
If the radiois
0 search for a stronger station when a station
is too
tuned to a station that is not broadcasting
RDS
weak for listening.
information, the station's frequency will remain on the
display. WhileRDS is on, the radio will searchfor a
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations
stronger station in the network when a station gets too
which broadcast RDS information.
weak for listening. Press theRDS SELECT button,
0RDS SELECT Press this button to use the
followed by this button again to turn RDS off. RDS
All
alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and
functions willbe turned off.
C PTY > ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons.
REGION: You can also use theRDS button to access
RDS SELECT will appear onthe display. The alternate
the region function. When an
RDS station becomes
RDS functions are only available when you
are using
weak, this function searchesfor a stronger station within
the FM band of your radio.
the same network.A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down into regions.
3-31
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic TA volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it
to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME will appear
are available to you. When the region function
on,isthe
radio only searches for stations in the same network andon the display while the volume is being adjusted.
region. You can only usethe region function whenRDS
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
press and holdthe RDS button for two seconds.
even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or
REGION: ON will appearon the display. While
compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
RDS
REGION: ON appears on the display, press the
network station for a traffic announcement,it will
button again to turn the region function
off. REGION:
return to the original station when
the announcement
OFF will appear onthe display. The region function can
is finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player
RDS button.
be turned on again by pressing the
was being used,the tape or compact disc will stay in the
TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followedby
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
this button to receive traffic announcements. The
Press the RDS SELECT button, followedby this button
radio will turn on theTA display. TP will appear on
again to turnTA off.
the displayif the tuned station broadcasts traffic
MSG (3): When RDS is on,if the current station has a
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button see
to the
the tuned station.If the current tuned station does not
message.
If
the
whole
message
does
not
appear
on the
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station which does. When the radio finds a station which display, partsof the message will appear every three
seconds until the message is completed.
To see the parts
broadcasts traffic announcements,it will stop. If no
of the message faster than everythree seconds, press this
station is found, NONEFOUND will appear on the
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. When SEEKor SCAN is pressed with the
display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
traffic announcement functionon, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements. MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received. Each message can only be read once.
While a traffic announcement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume calledTA volume. To increase
3-32
PTY (4): This button is used toturn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press theRDS SELECT
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear onthe display. If both PTY and
button, followed by this button. The PTY display will
turn on. RDS SELECT PTY NEWS will appear on the
display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the
last PTY selected.) Press theRDS SELECT button,
off.
followed by this button again to turn the PTY display
TA are on, the radio will searchfor stations with traffic
announcements and the selectedPTY.
< PTY > ( 5 ) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS SELECT
button, followed by < or > . The PTY display will turn
on, if it is not alreadyon. RDS SELECT: PTYNEWS
will appear on the display for three seconds. (The PTY
shown will be the lastPTY selected.) While this message
is displayed, use < and > to move up and down the
PTY list. If you pause on a PTY for three seconds,
PRESET PTY NEWS will appear on the display. While
this message is displayed, you can save the
PTY in a
preset by pressing one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Allow three seconds for the
message to disappear if youdo not want to save the PTY
in a preset. See “Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program
Type (FTY) Selections” in the Index.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
(PTYs).
you return to your favorite Program Types
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”
in the Index.You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMl and
six FM2). Just:
1. Turn PTY on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in an RDS station with the PTY you desire.
4. Press and hold oneof the six numbered buttonsfor
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the stepsfor each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
When the PTY display ison, press SEEK and SCAN to
RDS presets because the
will not have to reset your
find radio stationsof the PTY you want to listen to. The radio remembers them.
last PTY selected will be used
for seek and scan modes.
3-33
HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
for the
by one of these buttons to display the time
current station.STATION TIMEIS will be displayed.
NO STATION
If a time hasnot been sent to the radio,
TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to
the station,you may need to wait a minute before the
time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the
current displayed station time, press and hold
HR or
MN until TIMEUPDATED is displayed. Thereis a
two second delay before the time is updated.
RDS mode
does not have to be on use
to this function, but you must
be tuned to anFM RDS station.
ALERT This type of announcement warnsof national
turn off
or local emergencies.You will not be able to
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during these announcements. To
increase volume, turn the
PWRNOL knob tothe right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume.
TA VOLUME
will appear on the display while the volume is being
adjusted. When an alert announcement comes on the
tuned radio stationor a related network station, you will
hear it, even if the volumeis muted or a cassette tape or
MiniDisc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for an alert announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or MiniDisc player
is
playing, play will stopfor the announcement and resume
when the announcement is finished.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone
control (BASS, TREBLE orMIDRANGE) is found. The
radio keeps separate tone settings for each band, each
each source.
preset (except weather band presets) and
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control, press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this buttonto select
the desired level.
Using DSP Mode
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) featureis
used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences: TALK, FRONT SEAT, AMBIENCE and
SPACIOUS. DSP can be used while listening to the
radio, the cassette tape player or the MiniDisc player.
Press this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this
button until you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP
off, press and hold this button until
DSP OFF appears on
the display. When DSPOFF is displayed, the system
will provide the best overall Bose performance.
The radio keeps separate DSP settings
for each band
(except weather band, whichis always set to TALK) and
each source.
TALK: This setting is used when listening to
non-musical material suchas news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape.
TALK makes
spoken words sound very clear.
FRONT SEAT This setting adjusts the audioto
give the front seat occupants the best possible sound
qualities. FRONTSEAT can be used at any time
for
any material. Rearseat passengers inthe vehicle may
not get the same effect.
AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the
stereo effect.
SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
Adjusting the Speakers
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus(+) or minus (-) symbol
on this button to select
the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape.The tape will
begin playing as soon asit is inserted. Whenone side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays
the
other sideof your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radiooff but they will not start playing
until the radiois on. If you want to inserta cassette tape
when the ignitionis off, first press the eject button.
TONE, LEVEL
While the tape is playing, use the VOL,
and DSP controlsjust as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functions when a tape is
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAYwill appear on the display when a
tape is playing, withan arrow to indicate whichside of
the tape is playing.
3-35
1
1
~
1
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
couldbethat:
0
The cassette tapeis tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs
of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and
try turning the right
hub tothe left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player
is
working properly.
0
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see
if your
tape is broken.Try a new tape.)
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,
it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether
it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next
or previous selection onthe tape.
Your tape must have at least
three seconds of silence
between each selectionfor TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
seconds. The tape willgo to a selection, stop
for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side
of the tape
RW Press theleft arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The that is playing.
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to
your station pushbuttons to tune
to another radio station
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
while in RW mode. Pressthe left arrow again to return
activated with the radiooff and/or the ignitionoff.
to playing speed.
CLEAN TAPE:If this message appears on the display,
FF:Press the right arrow to
fast forward to another part
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. play tapes, but you should clean
it as soon as possible to
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune
to another
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care
of
radio station whilein FF mode. Press the right arrow
Your Cassette Tape Player” inthe Index. After you clean
again to return to playing speed.
the player, press and hold the eject button
for three
seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
3-36
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
Your cassette tape player automatically reduces
and try again.)
background noise from tapes encoded with Dolby NR.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license If any error occurs repeatedly or an
if error can’t be
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby corrected, please contact your dealer.
and the double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby
R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
MiniDisc. Release it to return to playing speed.
Auto Cr02 allows thecassette tape player to adjust to
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
the typeof cassette tapefor clearer soundfor Cr02
another partof the MiniDisc. Release to
it return to
cassette tapes.
playing speed.
Playing a MiniDisc
Insert a disc partwayinto the slot, label side up. The
player will pullit in. If the ignition and the radio areon
and the underlined MiniDisc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. MiniDiscs may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radiois on. If you want to insert a disc when
the ignition is off, first press theeject button.
While a MiniDisc is playing,
MD TRACK number will
appear on the display followed by ALBUM title, then
TRACK title.The display then reverts back to showing
MD TRACK number.
If you’re driving on a very rough roadif orit’s very
hot, the disc may not play. If thedisc comes out, it
could be that:
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed,it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to
seek to the next or previous selection on the MiniDisc.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections
for a few
seconds. The MiniDisc will go to a selection, stop for a
few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.
4h EJECT Press the upward triangle button to the
right of the MiniDisc playerto remove a MiniDisc.The
radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off
and/or the ignition off.
3-37
ription
Radio Data Systems(RDS) Program
Type
Description
(PTY) Selections
PTY List
Adlt Hit ...........................
Adult Hits
Any ....................................
Any
Classic1 .............................
Classical
Classical Rock
Cls Rock .......................
College
College ..............................
Country
Country .............................
Info ..............................
Information
Jazz
Jazz.. ..................................
Language ........................... Language
News .................................
News
Nostalga ............................
Nostalgia
Oldies ................................
Oldies
Persnlty ..........................
Personality
Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Public
Rhythm and Blues
R & B .......................
Re1 Musc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ReligiousMusic
Re1 Talk ........................
Religious Talk
3-38
PTY List
Rock M ...........................
Rock Music
Soft ....................................
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rock ..........................
sports ................................
sports
Talk ...................................
Talk
Top40 ...............................
Top40
Weather .............................
Weather
Factory PTY Presets
b e t
I
FMl
I
Preset 1
FM2
Jazz Adult Hits
Preset 2
Classical
Oldies
Preset 3
News
Religious Music
Preset 4
5
Preset 6
Soft Rock Public
Rock Preset
Country
R&B
Top 40
Console-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
Once you have loaded the discs in
the magazine, slide
open the doorof the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine intothe changer in the direction
of the
arrow markedon top of the magazine.
Close the doorby sliding it all the way forward.
When the CD magazine is loaded, the changer will
begin checkingfor discs in the magazine. This will
continue for up to one minute, depending on the
number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player,slide the
CD changer door all the way open, then press the
eject button. Remember tokeep the door closed
whenever possible to keepdirt and dust from
getting inside the changer.
Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in
on
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to six the changer, theCD changer symbol will appear
the radio display.If the CD changeris checking the
discs continuously.Normal size discs may be played
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flashon the
using the slots supplied in the magazine.
display until the changer is ready to play. When
a
You must first load the magazine with discs before you CD begins playing,a disc and track number will be
can play a compact disc. Load the CDs
from bottom to
displayed. The disc numbers are listed onthe front of
top, placinga disc in the magazine label
side up. If you
the magazine.
load a disc label side down,the disc will not play and an
All of the CD functions are controlled
by the radio
error will occur. Repeat this procedure
for loading up to
buttons, exceptfor ejecting theCD magazine.
six discsin the magazine.
3-39
PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons one through six to
select compact discs one through six. These pushbuttons
represent the order of the discs loaded in the changer.
REV: Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection.
FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whetherit is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to
seek to the next or previous selection onthe compact disc.
TRACK SCAN: When you press SCAN for less than
two seconds, you will hear the first few seconds of each
track on a disc. Press SCAN again to stop TRACK
SCAN. The CD will mute while scanning and SCAN
will appear on the display.
DISC SCAN: When you press SCAN for more than two
seconds, you will hear the first few seconds of the first
track on each disc. Press SCAN again to stop DISC
SCAN. The CDwill mute while scanning and SCAN
will appear on the display.
3-40
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on the
display to randomly seek through discs. Press RDM
again to turn off random play.
SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in the
changer. Each time you press this button, DISC
LOADING will appear on the display and the disc
number on the radio display will go tothat of the
next available CD.
SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. The
audio source must be loaded to play. If none of the
audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will
appear on the display. Press this button again or BAND
to switch back to the radio.
A EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way
open. Press the upward triangle button. The CD
magazine will eject.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
4. Insert the adapter.
CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed
for
the following:
This override routine will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
The road is too rough.The disc should play when
the road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label
side down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannotbe
corrected, please contact your dealer.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter
kit with your cassette
tape player after activating
the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold theSOURCE button for two seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash three
times, indicating thefeature is active.
Radio Personalization(If Equipped)
If DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or
DRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the
display when the radio isfirst turned on, your vehicle is
equipped with thisfeature.
With thisfeature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settings.
The settings
recalled by the radio are determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number onthe back of the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver1 or to driver2. The radio settings
by
will automatically adjust to where they were last set
the identified driver. The settings can also be recalled
by
1 or 2
briefly pressing the MEMORY seat buttons
located on the driver’s door.
Your radio can store home and away presets. Home
and away presets allow you to use one of
setpreset
radio settings in the area where you live, and another
set when you goout of town. Thatway, you will not
need to reprogram your presets every time you travel.
3-41
With the radiooff and the clock displayed, use
FF and
To select the away
RW to select home or away presets.
presets, press and hold
FF for five counts until you hear
a beep.The next time the radio comes
on, the away
presets willbe active. To select the home presets, press
and hold RW for five counts until you hear a beep.
The next time the radio comes on, the home presets
will be active.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset
your home radio presets because
the radio remembers them. However,
you will have to
reset your away radio presets.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@ is designed to discourage theft
of your
radio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrent
feature on each radio that
is automatic -- there is no
programming required.The radio in your vehicle
cannot be used in any other vehicle. When the radio
was originally installed in your vehicle at the factory,
it
stored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each
time the ignitionis turned on, the VIN is verified.
If the
vehicle’s VIN does not match the VIN stored in the
radio, THEFTLOCK will be activated and the audio
system will not play.If the radiois removed from your
vehicle, the original VIN
in the radio can be used to
trace the radio back to your vehicle.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controlscan
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
VOL: Press the up arrow
button to increase volume
and the down arrow button
to decrease volume.
SEL: When listening to the radio, press the
up or down
arrow button to tune to the next or previous preset radio
station. When listening to a cassette tape, the up or down
arrow button can be used SEEK
to
forward and rearward
through the tape. Pressing the up
or down arrow button
when listening toa CD will cause the player go
to to the
next or previous selection. When
in Radio Data Systems
(RDS) Program Type(PTY) mode, the up or down
arrow button can be used to performPTY
a preset seek.
PSEEK will appear on the display while the FTY preset
seek is performed. The radio will seek of
allthe PTYs
stored in presets, except for the PTY Any.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than
for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise
if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give youthe best sound, butFM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles ( 16 to 65 km). Tall
FM signals, causing
buildings or hills can interfere with
the sound to come and go.
Tips AboutYour Audio System
Hearing damagefrom loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control on your
radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before youadd any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
also interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that hasbeen added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobileradio andtelephone units.
0-
-0
3-43
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularlycan cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes
or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure
of the tape player.
Your tape player shouldbe cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
TAPE to indicate that you have used your tape player
If
for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
this message appearson the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned.It will still play tapes, but
you should cleanit as soon as possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player.
If you notice a
reduction in sound quality,
try a known good cassette
to seeif it is the tape or the tape player at fault.
If this
other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning methodfor your cassette
tape player is the use
of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape headas the hubsof the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassetteis available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
3-44
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unitis equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a brokenTo
tape.
prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold theSOURCE button for two
seconds. The tape symbol onthe display will
flash three times.
4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action
cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette afterthe manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type
of cleaning cassette will not
eject onits own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The useof a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you cleanthe player, press and hold
the eject
button for three seconds to resetthe CLEAN TAPE
indicator. The radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG
CLEARED to showthe indicator was reset.
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM-FM antennas are located in
the front
windshield and rear window. Be sure that
the inside
surfaces of the front windshield and rear window are
not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they
could interfere with radio reception.
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
NOTICE:
Handle discs carefully.Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight
and dust.If the surfaceof a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wipingfrom the center to theedge.
Do not try to clear frost or other material from
the inside of the rear window with a razor blade
or anything else that
is sharp. This may damage
the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the
edge of the hole andthe outer edge.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger,you
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
hear staticon your radio station, it could mean
that a
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised,
due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal tothe CD mechanism.
defogger grid line has been damaged.
If this is true, the
grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to
your vehicle, and the antenna needs
to be attached tothe
glass, be sure that youdo not damage the grid linesfor
the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular telephone
antenna overthe grid lines.
3-45
@% NOTES
3-46
fp'
-%
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you'll find information about driving on different kinds
of roads and in varying weather conditions. We've also
included many other usefultips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4- 10
4- 12
4-13
4- 14
4- 15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 17
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-29
4-3 1
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect theunexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Beready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about themost preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehiclein front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please startwith a very important safety device in your
Cadillac: Buckle up. (See“Safety Belts” in the Index.)
4-2
Defensive drivingrequires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving
techniques could save
your life.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s
the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands
of victims
every year.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
if the
what if people do? How much is “too much”
driver plansto drive? It’s a lotless than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affectsfour things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC)
of someone
who is drinking depends uponfour things:
Drunken Driving
0
Judgment
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
MuscularCoordination
0
The drinker’s body weight
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half
of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the resultof someone who was drinking
and driving. In recentyears, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
so they
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,
never drive after drinking.For persons under21, it’s
U.S. state to drink alcohol.
against the law in every
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasonsfor these laws.
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
(120 ml) glasses
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce
of wine orthree mixed drinks if each had- 1/2
1 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Since alcohol is carriedin body water, this means thata
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than
a
man of her same body weight wheneach has the same
number of drinks.
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing numberof U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limitfor all
commercial drivers in the United States 0.04
is percent.
The BAC will be over0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (inone hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
drinks, and
depends on how much alcohol is in the
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to driveis affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired atBAC
a approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example, if
0.05 percent.
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces
Statistics
show
that
the
chance
of
being
in
a collision
or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.12 percent. A person who
BAC would be close to
of
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a
somewhat lower BAC level.
collision. At a BAC level
of 0.10 percent, the chance of
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collisionis 12 times greater; at a
a lower relative percentage
of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is25 times greater!
4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself
of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold
showers will speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as whenchild
a darts into the street?
A person with evena moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s somethingelse about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cordor
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.
Drinking and then driving very
is dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand
judgment canbe affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if‘ you drive after drinking.
Please don’tdrink and driveor ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab;or if
you’re witha group, designatea driver who will
not drink.
--
--
~~
~~~~~~~~~
~~
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play apart. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts-- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake.Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wearout much
faster if you doa lot of heavy braking.If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake
life.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you willstill have some power brake assist. But
you will useit when you brake. Once the power assist
is used up, it may take longer tostop and the brake
pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes(ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
front of you.
4-7
You slam on thebrakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn't change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster front of you, you won't have time to apply yourbrakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
enough room up ahead to stor>,even though youhave
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don't pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Traction Control System
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that
one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
4-8
The TRACTION ENGAGED message will display
on
the Driver Information Center when
the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See “Driver Information
Center Messages” inthe Index. You may feelor hear the
system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control
will
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you
to safely use it again, youm y reengage the cruise control.
(See “Cruise Control” inthe Index.)
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
if you ever need to.(You
traction control system off
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud,ice or snow. See “RockingYour
Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system off,
press the traction control
disable button located on
the center console.
TRACTION
CONTROL
United States
Canada
This warning light willcome on to let you know if
there’s a problem with your traction control system.
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on,
the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TRACTIONOW message will displayon the
Driver Information Center.If the system is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION
OFF message will display-- but the system won’t turn
off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a
current needto limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing Steering Tips
the button again. The TRACTION READY message
should display briefly on the Driver Information Center. Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake
at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system
is not functioning,you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
A lotof the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driveror beginner, eachof us is subject to
the same lawsof physics when drivingon curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet
ice, you’ll understand this.
on the
The traction you can get in a curve depends
condition of your tires and the road surface,
the angle
MAGNASTEEP
at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
Your vehicle may be equipped with
GM
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
MAGNASTEER, a system that continuously adjusts the can control.
effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds.
It
provides ease when parking yet a firm, solid feel at
highway speeds.
4-10
Suppose you’re steering througha sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration-- have to do
their work where the tires meet road.
the Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand
too much of those
places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction
Control System” in the Index.
To help you steer in the direction you want to go, during
certain sharp or sudden cornering maneuvers, gear
selection is controlled. This will maximize the available
drive wheel torque and minimize the transaxle response
time and shift activity. During this kind
of maneuver, the
transaxle shifts automatically as vehicle speed changes.
Steering in Emergencies
What should youdo if this ever happens? Ease up on the
There are times when steering
can be more effective
accelerator pedal,steer the vehiclethe way you wantit
than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and
to go, and slow down.
find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls
Since your vehicle is equipped with Stabilitrak, you will out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between
see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED messageon the
parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can
Driver Information Center.See “Stability Sys Engaged
avoid these problems by braking-- if you can stop in
Message” in theIndex.
time. But sometimes you can’t; thereisn’t room.
That’s the timefor evasive action-- steering around
Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should
the problem.
adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speedsare
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
go slower.
favorable conditions you’ll want to
like these. First apply your brakes.
(See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.)
It is betterto
If you need to reduce your speed
as you approach a
remove as much speed as you can
from a possible
curve, doit before you enter the curve, while your
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
front wheels are straight ahead.
or right depending on the space available.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintaina reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate untilyou are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently intothe straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find thatyour right wheels have droppedoff the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a goodreason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle aboutt6 pa$$ ‘hother on a
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since
the
passing vehicle occupiesthe same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrenderto frustration or anger can
suddenly putthe passing driverface to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision.
So here are some tipsfor passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect
your passing patterns.If you have anydoubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
Watch for traflic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can seea sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken
all right to pass
center line usually indicates it’s
cross a solid
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never
line on your side of the lane
or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close tothe vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, followingtoo closely reduces your area
of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slowsor stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass
is coming up,
start to accelerate but stayin the right lane and don’t
so you will be
get too close. Time your move
increasing speedas the time comesto move into the
other lane.If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes for
up the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happensto cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
to
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying
pass you asyou pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-13
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lanechange signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to befarther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
4-14
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route
or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.
If your traction control system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your
foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go.If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straightenout. Always be readyfor a
second skidif it occurs.
If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information
Center. See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.
Of course, tractionis reduced when water, snow,ice,
on the road. For safety, you’ll
gravel or other material is
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down
on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving ona surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid suddensteering, acceleration or
braking (includingengine braking by shifting toa lower
gear). Any sudden changes could causethe tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicleis skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” and slow down
when you have any doubt.
--
Night drivingis more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, orby fatigue.
Here are some tipson night driving.
0
Drivedefensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only
so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When
you are facedwith severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,
or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night
is made much
of the glass
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside
can buildup a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up
far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But aseyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Justas your headlamps should be
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
checked regularlyfor proper aim, so should your eyes
driver may require at least twice as much lightseetothe
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light-- and aren’t
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night even awareof it.
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
Night Vision
4-16
Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving.The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades arein good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harderto see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings,the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips
of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good as on dry roads.
4-17
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or even
can cause problems, too.
going through some car washes
The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down beforeyou hit them.
I
A CAUTION:
-
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with
the road.
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But
it can if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure inone or
more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple”
the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and
fast rule about hydroplaning.The
best adviceis to slow down whenit is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” inthe Index.)
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
plan your trip into an
going. Get a city map and
unknown part of the cityjust as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities.You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green lightas a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corneris busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and
just before you
start to move, check both ways
for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch
out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
E
At the entrance, thereis usually a r a p that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view
of the freeway as you
drive alongthe entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch
on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly withthe traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leavethe lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there
isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are
the safest
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
proper lane wellin advance. If you miss your exit, do
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
up with traffic and keep to
the right. Drive at the same
on to the next exit.
speed mostof the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp canbe curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left laneon a freeway as a passing
lane.
The exit speed is usually posted.
a Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your senseof motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend
to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
0
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip.Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the
recommended pressure?
Before Leaving ona Long Trip
0
Weather Forecasts:What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh-- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to maketoo many miles thatfirst part
you
of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip?If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs
service, haveit done before starting out.
Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Cadillac dealerships all across North America. They’ll
be ready and willing to help if you need
it,
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0 Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at
the wheel? Callit
of
awareness,
or whatever.
highway hypnosis, lack
There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the droneof the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road less
in
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Hill and Mountain Roads
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull offthe road into a rest, service
or parking area andtake a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness onthe highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains
is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularlyin steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These partscan work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will
have to do all the work of slowing down. They
could getso hot that they wouldn’t workwell.
You would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could
crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle ingear
when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to knowis this: let your engine do someof
the slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when
you
hill.
go down a steep or long
IA
AUTION:
0
I
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash.Shift down to let
your engine assistyour brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
0
0
0
4-24
Know how togo uphill. You may wantto shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help you climb
the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
or cut
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of
a hill,be alert. There couldbe
something in your lane,like a stalled car oran accident.
of
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tipsfor winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
if will
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, you
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a couple
of burlap bags
to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving onSnow or Ice
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow orice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the ice can be even more trouble because
it may offer the
road probably have good traction.
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32OF;0 O C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
However, if there is snow orice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
have a lotless traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow-- drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves
your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control
system, you’ll wantto slow down and adjust your
driving to the road conditions.See “Traction Control
System” in the Index.
,...,...
D
c
4-26
....
. ...,,- .
A
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Even
though you havethe anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock”in the Index.
If You’re Caught ina Blizzard
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered withice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas wherethe sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could inbea
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know
for sure that you are near help
are some
and you can hike through the snow. Here
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-27
0
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keepwarm, but be careful.
4-28
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you
and kill
you. You can’t seeit orsmell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle.Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a windowjust a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine onlyas long as you must.This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make
it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on
with your headlamps.Let the heater run for a while.
Loading Your Vehicle
FRT.
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
CTR. RR.
TOTAL LBS.
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
COLD TIRE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
PRESSURE
SPEED
SIZE TIRE
all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again
PSI/KPa
RTG
and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable
FRT.
RR.
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
SPA.
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
every half hour or so until help comes.